9th-class-Foundation-Book
Uploaded by
vijaygunatpc9th-class-Foundation-Book
Uploaded by
vijaygunatpcCLASS IX-PHYSICS MUNICIPAL SCHOOLS-GOVT.OF A.P.
PHYSICS
Class – IX
Contents
MOTION
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
COLLISIONS
GRAVITATION
FLUID MECHANICS
WORK, POWER & ENERGY
RAY OPTICS
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. i
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MUNICIPAL SCHOOLS-GOVT.OF A.P.
INDEX
S.NO. CONTENT DETAILS PAGE NO.
MOTION
1. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 1 - 15
2. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 15 - 20
3. Synopsis & Worksheet -3 21 - 27
4. Synopsis & Worksheet -4 28 - 38
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 39 - 43
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
5. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 44 - 52
6. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 53 - 59
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 60 - 60
CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
7. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 61 - 68
8. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 68 - 71
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 72 - 76
COLLISIONS
9. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 77- 86
10. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 86 - 92
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 93 - 95
GRAVITATION
11. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 96- 104
12. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 105 - 111
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 112 - 112
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. i i
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MUNICIPAL SCHOOLS-GOVT.OF A.P.
FLUID MECHANICS
13. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 113- 126
14. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 127 - 132
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 132 - 134
WORK, POWER & ENERGY
15. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 135- 141
16. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 142 - 147
17. Synopsis & Worksheet -3 147 - 156
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 157 - 157
RAY OPTICS
18. Synopsis & Worksheet -1 158- 174
19. Synopsis & Worksheet -2 174 - 183
20. Synopsis & Worksheet -3 183 - 190
21. Synopsis & Worksheet -4 191 - 203
22. Synopsis & Worksheet -5 203 - 208
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS 208 - 217
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. iii
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
MOTION
MEMO GRAPH
MOTION
Uniform Uniform accelerated Motion under projectile
motion motion gravity motion
nonuniform
motion Freely falling Body projected
body vertically up wards
1 2 a
v = u + at s ut at 2 2
v – u = 2as sn u 2n 1
2 2
Maximum
Range Time of flight
height
Time of ascent Time of descent
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 1
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
KNOW YOUR SCIENTIST
Galileo Galilei (1564 - 1642)
Galileo Galilei was a key figure in the scientific revolution
in Europe about four centuries ago. Galileo proposed the
concept of acceleration. From experiments on motion of
bodies on inclined planes or falling, freely, he contradicted
the Aristotelian notion that a force was required to keep a
body in motion and that heavier bodies fall faster than lighter
bodies under gravity. He thus arrived at the law of inertia
that was the starting point of the subsequent epochal work
Galileo Galilei of Isaac Newton. Newton brought out another masterpiece
(1564 - 1642) optics that summarized his work on light and colour.
MOTION
MOTION_SYNOPSIS-1
1. Mechanics : The branch of physics which deals with the motion of objects in
everyday life is called mechanics.
2. It is divided into , Kinematics, Dynamics and Statics.
i) Kinematics : Kinematics which is derived from a Greek word kinema meaning
motion, is a branch of physics, which deals with the motion of a body without
taking into account the cause of motion.
ii) Dynamics : Dynamics , which is derived from the Greek word dyna meaning
power, is a branch of physics which deals with the motion of bodies by taking into
account the cause of motion (force).
iii) Statics : Statics deals with bodies at rest under the effect of different forces.
3. Point object :
An object is said to be a point object if its size is very small as compared to the
distance travelled by it in the given time interval.
Ex : i) A bus travelling a distance of 100 km can be considered as a point object.
This is because the size of the bus is very small as compared to distance travelled
by it.
ii) A car travelling a distance of 50 km can be considered as a point object. This is
because the size of car is very small as compared to the distance travelled by it.
4. Reference point : A fixed point or a fixed object with respect to which the given
body changes its position is known as reference point.
5. Rest : A body is said to be at rest if it does not change its position with respect to
the reference point. The objects which remain stationary at a place and do not
change their position are said to be at rest.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 2
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Ex : A chair lying in a room is in the state of rest, because it doesnot change its
position with respect to the surroundings of the room.
7. Motion : A body is said to be in motion if it changes its position with respect to the
surroundings with the passage of time. All moving things are said to be in motion.
Ex : A car is changing its position w.r.t trees, houses etc. is in the state of motion.
8. Rest and motion are relative terms : Rest and motion are relative terms. A body
can be at rest as well as in motion at the same time. When we say that a body or
an object is in motion, then it is essential to see whether the body or object
changes its position with respect to other bodies or objects around it or with
respect to any fixed point known as reference point. For example, when a bus
moves on a road, then the bus as well as the passengers sitting in it change their
position with respect to a person standing on the road side. So, the bus and the
passengers sitting in it are in motion with respect to the person standing on the
road side. However, the passengers sitting in the bus do not change their posi-
tions with respect to each other. It means, the passengers sitting in a moving bus
are not in motion with respect to each other.
Ex : A person sitting in the compartment of a moving train is in the state of rest,
with respect to the surroundings of compartment. Yet he is in the state of motion,
if he compares himself with surroundings outside the compartment.
Note : In order to describe the motion of an object we need to keep in mind three
things.
1. The distance of the body from a reference point. This reference point is
called the origin of the motion of the body.
2. The direction of motion of the body.
3. The time of motion.
Terms related to Kinematics :
Distance : The distance travelled by a body is actual length of the path covered by
a moving body irrespective of the direction in which the body travels.
C
N
3 km W E
S
A B
4 km
Fig. (ii)
(i) Suppose a man lives at place A as in figure (ii), and he has to reach another
place C, but first he has to meet his friend living at place B.
(ii) Now, the man starts from point A and travels a distance of 4 km to reach B
towards East, and then travels another 3 km from B to reach C toward North.
(iii) Thus, the total length of the path i.e. AB + BC = 4 km + 3 km = 7 km gives the
distance travelled by the man and it has no specific direction.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 3
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Displacement : When a body moves from one position to another, the shortest
distance between the initial position and final position.
Note :
1. The displacement of an object in a given interval of time can be positive, zero
or negative whereas distance travelled is always positive.
2. Distance is a scalar quantity whereas displacement is a vector quantity.
Displacement (Vector notation) : We know distance is the actual path length
covered by a moving particle or body in a given time interval, while displacement
is the change in position vector, i.e., a vector joining initial to final position. If a
particle moves from A to C through a path ABC.
Y
B
r C
A
rA rC
Then distance s travelled is the actual path length ABC, while the displacement
is r rC rA
If a particle moves in a straight line without change in direction, the magnitude of
displacement is equal to the distance travelled otherwise it is always less than it.
Thus displacement dis tan ce .
1. Speed :
The distance covered by a body in unit time is called Speed.
2. Mathematical Expression of Speed : The speed can be found by dividing the dis-
distance
tance covered by the time in which the distance is covered. i.e., Speed =
time
3. Units of Speed: C.G.S unit of speed is centimetre per second (cm/s).
S.I. unit of speed is metre per second (m/s).
Bigger unit of speed is km/hr. The relation between km/hr and m/s is
1km 1000m 5 5
1kmph = = = m /s 1km/hr = m/s
1hr 3600s 18 18
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 4
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
4 Types of Speed
Uniform Speed : If a body covers equal distances in equal intervals of time
(however small the time intervals may be), then the body is said to have uni-
form speed or constant speed.
Note : If the ratio of distance travelled and time taken by a moving body is con-
dis tance
stant, i.e., cons tan t then we say that the body is moving with uni-
time
form speed.
Non-Uniform Speed :
If a body covers unequal distances in equal intervals of time (however small
the time intervals may be), then the body is said to have uniform speed or
constant speed.
Note : If the ratio of distance travelled and time taken by a moving body is not
distance
constant, i.e., constant then we say that the body is moving with vari-
time
able speed.
AVERAGE SPEED AND INSTANTANEOUS SPEED :
Average speed: When the body is moving with nonuniform speed, then we calcu-
late its average speed by dividing the total distance covered by the total time
taken to cover the distance.
Total distance covered
Average speed =
Total time taken to cover the distance
s
vav
t2 t1
Instantaneous speed:
Let s be the distance travelled in the time interval t to t t . The average
s
speed in this time interval is vav
t
The instantaneous speed at a time t is defined as
s ds
v lim
t 0 t dt
where s is the distance travelled in time t. The average speed is defined for a
time interval and the instantaneous speed is defined at a particular instant.
Instantaneous speed is also called “speed”.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 5
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
SCIENTIFIC FACT
Does the Sun rotate ?
Yes, the sun too rotates about its axis. But unlike the earth, which has rotation period
of one day, the sun has a ‘differential rotation’.
That is, all parts of the sun do not have the same period of rotation. The period of
rotation near its equator is 26.9 days, at sun spot zone (16 degrees north) it is 27.3 days
and at the pole it is 13.1 days (syndical).
Introduction to Velocity : The rate of change of displacement is called velocity.
Mathematical Expression of Velocity : Velocity of a body can be found by divid-
displacement
ing the displacement with time. i.e., Velocity =
time taken
Units of Velocity : C.G.S unit of velocity is centimetre per second(cm/s).
S.I. unit of velocity is metre per second (m/s).
Note : The units of velocity is the same as the units of speed. However in case of
velocity the direction is specified.
Types of velocity
Uniform velocity : Observe a car moving along a straight road towards east.
D
25km 25km 25km East
We observe that the car covers equal distances in equal intervals of time in a
specified direction.
Here we say that the car is said to be moving with uniform velocity.
Note: A body has uniform velocity only if :
i) If it covers equal displacements in equal intervals of time
ii) Its direction of motion remains the same.
Non Uniform velocity : Observe a car moving on a straight road:
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 6
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
40km 20km 30km
We observe that the car covers unequal displacements in equal intervals of time
[or equal displacements in unequal intervals of time (however small these inter-
vals may be]].
Here we say that the car is said to be moving with non uniform velocity or variable
velocity.
Average Velocity :
When the body moves with non uniform velocity, then we calculate its average
velocity by dividing the total displacement by the total time taken.
Total displacement
Average velocity =
Total time taken
s
Mathematically, vav
t
Note: When a particle moves with different velocities v1 , v2 , v3 etc., in different time
intervals t1 , t 2 , t 3 etc. respectively, its average velocity over the total time of
motion can be given as
Net displacement vector s s1 s 2 s 3 ........
vav
total time t t1 t 2 t3 ......
Where the displacement of the particle during time interval t1 , t 2 etc. are given as
v1 t1 v2 t 2 .....
s1 v1 t1, s2 v 2 t 2 etc., vav
t1 t 2 .....
i n i n
v av v i t i
i 1
t
i 1
i
Instantaneous Velocity :
s s
Instantaneous velocity v Lim v
t0 t t
* Instantaneous speed is equal to the magnitude of instantaneous velocity.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 7
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
ASTONISHING FACT
Inspite of being 400 times smaller how is the Moon able to mask the Sun ?
The moon is very close to the Earth compared to the sun. By a remarkable
coincidence, their sizes and distances are such that for an observer on the Earth, they
seem to be of the same size (angular size). If the Moon is at a far off distance, it will not be
able to completely cover the sun but cast only a shadow on it.
Introduction to Acceleration :
The increase in velocity per unit time is called acceleration.
The decrease in velocity per unit time is called deceleration or retardation.
Negative acceleration is called Retardation or Deceleration.
Mathematical Expression of Acceleration :
Total change in velocity
Rate of change of velocity =
Total time required for change
But the rate of change of velocity is called acceleration.
Change in velocity
i.e., Acceleration =
time taken
In the above case the acceleration of the car is 20kmhr–2. It means that for every
one hour the increase in velocity is 20km/hr.
Units of Acceleration : C.G.S. unit of acceleration is cms–2.
S.I. unit of acceleration is ms–2.
Uniform acceleration :
An object is said to be moving with uniform acceleration if its velocity changes by
equal amounts in equal intervals of time.
MOTION_WORKSHEET-1
1. If the distance covered by a particle is zero, what can you say about its
displacement
1) It may (or) may not be zero 2) It cannot be zero
3) It is negative 4) It must be zero
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 8
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
2. If the displacement of a particle is zero, distance covered by it
1) May (or) may not be zero 2) Must be zero
3) Is negative 4) All are true
3. A man leaves his house for a cycle ride. He comes back to his house after one
hour after covering a distance of 2 km. Then the displacement of a man is _______
m.
1) 2 2) 3 3) 0 4) 1
4. If a body moves in a circular path and reach back to its initial position then
1) magnitude of displacement is 0 2) distance is 0
3) both (1) and (2) are correct 4) distance is equal to radius
5. If on a round trip one person travels 6km and arrive back to his starting point,
then the distance travelled is ______ km.
1) 4 2) 6 3) 8 4) 10
6. A body moving at a uniform velocity of 2 m/s will have
1) uniform acceleration 2) non uniform acceleration
3) zero acceleration 4) none of these
7. The numerical ratio of displacement to distance is
1) Always less than 1. 2) Always greater than 1.
3) Always equal to 1. 4) May be less than 1 or equal to one.
8. The location of a particle is changed. What can we say about the displacement
and distance covered by the particle?
1) Both cannot be zero 2) One of the two may be zero
3) Both must be zero 4) Both must be equal
9. Consider the motion of the tip of the second hand of a clock. In one minute
1) the average speed is zero 2) the distance covered is zero
4) the displacement is zero 3) all of these
10. The numerical value of the ratio of average velocity to average speed is
1) always less than one 2) always equal to one
3) always more than one 4) equal to or less than one.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 9
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
11. If a particle moves in a circle describing equal angles in equal intervals of time,
the velocity vector
1) remains constant. 2) changes in magnitude.
3) changes in direction. 4) changes both in magnitude and direction.
12. Check up only the correct statement in the following.
1) A body has a constant velocity and still it can have a varying speed
2) A body has a constant speed but it can have a varying velocity
3) A body having constant speed cannot have any acceleration.
4) None of these.
13. The acceleration of a body has the direction of
1) Distance 2) Velocity
3) Change of velocity 4) None of these
14. The numerical value of the ratio of instantaneous velocity to instantaneous speed
is
1) Always less than one 2) Always equal to one
3) Always more than one 4) Equal to or less then one
15. The magnitude of displacement is equal to the distance covered in a given interval
of time is the particle.
1) Moves with constant acceleration along the path
2) Moves with constant speed only
3) Moves in a same direction with constant velocity or with variable velocity
4) Moves with constant velocity only
16. The ratio of the average velocity of a train during a journey to the maximum
velocity between two stations is
1) =1 2) > 1 3) < 1 4) > or < 1
17. Consider the motion of the tip of the second hand of a clock. In one minute
1) the average velocity is zero 2) the distance covered is zero
3) the average speed is zero 4) all of these
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 10
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
18. A body moves with a uniform velocity. Among the following the correct statement
is
1) Its velocity is zero 2) Its speed is zero
3) Its acceleration is zero 4) Both 1 & 2 are correct
19. Acceleration of a body is zero when
1) Velocity of a body increases with time 2) Velocity of a body decreases with time
3) Velocity of a body constant with time 4) both(1) & (2)
20. Acceleration is negative when
1) Velocity of a body increases with time 2) Velocity of a body decreases with time
3) Velocity of a body constant with time 4) All of these.
21. Acceleration is positive when
1) Velocity of a body increases with time 2) Velocity of a body decreases with time
3) Velocity of a body constant with time 4) All of these.
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A player completes a circular path of radius ‘r’ in 40s. At the end of 2
minutes 20 seconds, displacement will be
1) 2r 2) 2r 3) 7r 4) Zero
2. A body goes 20 km north and then 10 km due east. The displacement of body from
its starting point is
1) 30 km 2) 25.2 km 3) 10 km 4) 22.36 km
3. A man walks 4m towards north then 3m towards east and there he climbs a pole
of 12m height.
1) distance covered by man is 13 m 2) total displacement by man is 13 m
3) distance covered by man is 21 m 4) total displacement by man is 19 m
4. A body is moving along the circumference of a circle of radius ‘R’ and completes
half of the revolution. Then, the ratio of its displacement to distance is
1) :2 2) 2:1 3) 2: 4) 1:2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 11
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
5. A body completes one round of a circle of radius ‘R’ in 20 second. The displacement
of the body after 45 second is
R
1) 2) 2R 3) 2 R 4) 2R
2
6. If the distance between the sun and the earth is 1.5x1011 m and velocity of light is
3x108 m/s, then the time taken by a light ray to reach the earth from the sun is
1) 500 s 2) 500 minute 3) 50 s 4) 5 103s
7. If a body covers first half of its journey with uniform speed v1 and the second half
of the journey with uniform speed v2, then the average speed is
2 v1v 2 v1v 2
1) v1 v2 2)
v1 v 2 3)
v1 v 2 4) v1v2
8. A body moves with a velocity of 3m/s due east and then turns due north to travel
with the same velocity. If the total time of travel is 6s, the acceleration of the
body is
1
1) 3 m/s2 towards north west 2)
2
m/s2 towards north west
2
3) 2 m/s towards north east 4) all the above
9. Given the distance between earth and sun is 1.6 × 108 km and velocity of light is
4×105 km/sec. The time taken for sunlight to reach the earth is
1) 400 s 2) 700 s 3) 500 s 4) 600 s
10. Rajdhani express moves at a speed of 120 km/h. How long will it take to cover a
distance of 15 km?
1) 6.4 min 2) 2.3 min 3) 7.5 min 4) 8.3 min
11. A car travels a distance of 250 km from Hyderabad to Guntur in 5 hours, the
velocity of the car for this journery is
1) 40 kmph 2) 50 kmph 3) 60 kmph 4) 70 kmph
12. A car is moving at a speed of 15 ms–1. In how much time will it cover a
distance of 1.2 km ?
1) 70 s 2) 80 s 3) 18 s 4) 45 s
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 12
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Multi Correct Choice Type:
13. An object may have
1) varying speed without having varying velocity
2) varying velocity without having varying speed
3) non zero acceleration without having varying velocity
4) non zero acceleration without having varying speed.
14. In which of the following examples of motion, can the body be considered
approximately a point object
1) a railway carriage moving without jerks between two stations.
2) a monkey sitting on top of a man cycling smoothly on a circular track
3) a spinning cricket ball that turns sharply on hitting the ground
4) a trumbling beaker that has slipped off the edge of a table
15. Which of the following statements is/ are correct ?
1) If the velocity of a body changes, it must have some acceleration.
2) If the speed of a body changes, it must have some acceleration
3) If the body has acceleration, its speed must change
4) If the body has acceleration, its speed may change.
16. Pick out the correct statement from the following.
1) displacement is a vector quantity and hence direction is important
2) displacement can be both positive and negative
3) distance is always positive. It never decreases with time
4) distance can be negative
Statement Type:
17. Statement I : Acceleration of a body can change its direction without any
change in direction of velocity
Statement II: Direction of acceleration is same as that of direction of change in
velocity vector
1) If Statement I is true, Statement II is true, Statement II is a correct explana-
tion for Statement I
2) If Statement I is true, Statement II is true, Statement II is not a correct
explanation for Statement I
3) If Statement I is true, Statement II is false
4) If Statement I is false, Statement II is true
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 13
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
18. Statement I: Magnitude of average velocity is equal to average speed, if velocity
is constant.
Statement II : If velocity is constant, then there is no change in the direction.
1) If Statement I is true, Statement II is true, Statement II is a correct explana-
tion for Statement I
2) If Statement I is true, Statement II is true, Statement II is not a correct
explanation for Statement I
3) If Statement I is true, Statement II is false
4) If Statement I is false, Statement II is true
Comprehension Type:
A cyclist moves from a certain point X and moves around a circular path of radius r.
O r X
19. If the cyclist completes one revolution around a circular path of radius ‘r’. Then, the
distance travelled and magnitude of displacement of the cyclist are respectively
1) 2r , r 2) , 2 3) 2 r, zero 4) r, 2r
2
20. If the cyclist reaches exactly the other side of the point X (i.e. diametrically opposite
point to X). Then, the distance travelled and magnitude of displacement of cyclist
are respectively
r
1) r , 2r 2) , 2 3) 2 r, zero 4) r, 2r
2
21. If the cyclist reaches a point ‘Z’ as shown in the figure, then the distance travelled
and magnitude of displacement of the cyclist are respectively
r r r
1) , 2r 2) , 4r 3) , 2r 4) 2 r, zero
2 4 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 14
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Matrix Match Type:
22. A boy walks along the square path. ABCD of side 5m. Then match the following.
5m
A B
5m 5m
D C
5m
Column - I Column - II
a) Along the path ABC, the distance travelled by a boy is 1) 5 2 m
b) Along the path CDA, the displacement covered by a boy 2) 10 2 m
c) Total distance covered by a boy along the path ABCDA 3) 20 m
d) Total displacement covered by a boy along the path ABCDA 4) 10 m
5) zero
MOTION_SYNOPSIS-2
1. Recap of equations of motion for a body moving with uniform acceleration are:
1 2 a
a) v u at b) s ut at c) v2 u2 2as d) sn u (2n 1)
2 2
Where u = initial velocity, v = final velocity, a = acceleration, t = total time,
s = displacement and sn = displacement in nth second.
2. Motion due to gravity : Motion due to gravity can be studied as:
a) Freely falling body b) Body projected vertically upwards
c) Projectile motion.(will be discussed later)
Freely falling body: Whenever a body is falling freely ( no initial force is applied )
then u = 0 . The equations for a freely falling body are:
1 2 g
a) v=gt b) s(or)h gt c) v 2 2gh v 2gh d) sn [2n 1]
2 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 15
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
MOTION_WORKSHEET-2
1. A boy is Runing towards east with a velocity of 10m/s. he suddenly
turns towards north. Then at that place acceleration due to gravity is
1. Increases 2. Decreases 3. Remains same 4. Zero
2. A 1000kg and 10kg objects are dropped from the same height, then the ratio of
acceleration of fall of two bodies is
1. 1:1 2. 100:1 3. 1: 100 4. 10: 1
3. A huge rock and stone are dropped from same height, then
1 Both reaches the ground at the same time
2. Huge rock take more time than a stone
3. Stone takes more time than a huge rock
4. They reach the ground with different velocity
4. The direction of acceleration due to gravity is always
1. Towards the centre of earth 2. Along the tangent of earth
3. Along the chrod of earth 4. Away from the surface of earth
5. The dimensional formula for ‘g’ is
0 2 2
1. M L T 0
2. M LT
2
0 0 2
3. M L T
4. MLT
2
6. If a body is falling freely under the acceleration due to gravity, the final velocity of
the body when it reaches the ground is directly praportional to
1. Time taken by the body 2. Square of time taken by the body
3. Cube of time taken by the body 4. Independent on time
7. If a body is falling freely then the acceleration due to gravity is taken as ________.
1) equal 2) negative 3) positive 4) infinity
8. For a freely falling body, initial velocity is ___________.
1) zero 2) infinite 3) non zero 4) one
9. Two stones of different masses are dropped simultaneously from the top
of a building. Then which is correct among these?
1) larger stone hits the ground earlier.
2) smaller stone hits the ground earlier.
3) velocity of the stones are independent on the mass 4)none of these.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 16
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
10. A body, freely falling under gravity will have uniform
1) speed 2) velocity 3) momentum 4) acceleration
11. Two bodies of different masses are dropped simultaneously from the top of a
tower. If air resistance is proportional to the mass of the body, then,
1) the heavier body reaches the ground earlier.
2) the lighter body reaches the ground earlier.
3) both the bodies reach the ground simultaneously.
4) cannot be decided.
12. If two balls of same density but of different masses are dropped from a height of
100 m, then
1) both will come together on the earth
2) both will come late on the earth
3) first will come first and second after that
4) second will come first and first after that
13. The distances moved by a freely falling body (starting from rest) during 1 st, 2nd,
3rd,......nth second of its motion are proportional to
1) even numbers 2) odd numbers
3) all integral numbers 4) squares of integral numbers
14. A body falls freely from a tower of height ‘h’. The velocity with which it strikes the
ground is [g = acceleration due to gravity]
2g g h
1) 2gh 2) 3) 4) g
h h
15. Two bodies of different masses are dropped from heights of 16m and 25m
respectively. The ratio of the time taken by them is
1 25: 16 2. 5 : 4 3. 4: 5 4. 16 : 25
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. If a body is dropped freely from a height of 20m, then velocity of the body on
reaching to the ground is [g 10m / s 2 ]
1. 20m/s 2. 100m/s 3. 150m/s 4. 200m/s
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 17
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
2. If a body is dropped freely from a height of 20m, then the time taken by the body to
reach the ground is
1. 2 sec 2. 2 sec 3. 10 sec 4. 10 sec
3. If a body is dropped freely, then what is velocity of the body after ‘2’ sec
[g 10m / s 2 ]
1. 10m/s 2. 20 m/s 3. 15 m/s 4. 200 m/s
4. A stone is dropped from the top of the tower and reaches the ground in 3s. Then
the height of the tower is ( g = 9.8m/s2)
1) 18.6m 2) 39.2m 3) 44.1m 4) 98m
5. The average velocity of a freely falling body is numerically equal to half of the
acceleration due to gravity. The velocity of the body as it reaches the ground is
g g
1) g 2) 3) 4) 2g
2 2
6. A boy standing at the top of a tower of 20 m height drops a stone Assuming
g 10 ms 2 , the velocity with which it hits the ground is [AIPMT 2011]
1) 20 ms 1 2) 40 ms 1 3) 5 ms 1 4) 10 ms 1
7. The height from which a body is released is numerically equal to the velocity
acquired finally. Then that height is equal to.
1. g 2. 2g 3. 4g 4. 8g
8. A freely falling body describes a distance x in the first 2 seconds and a distance
y in the next 2 seconds . then
1.y=x 2. y = 2x 3. x = 2y 4. y =3x
9. A body is dropped from height ‘h’ at time t = o, reaches the ground at
time ‘ t o ’. The time taken by which it would have reached a height ‘h/2’ is
1. t o / 2 2. 2t o 3. t o / 2 4. 2t o
10. A ball is dropped freely while another is thrown vertically downward with an
initial velocity ‘v’ from the same point simultaneously. After ‘t’ second they are
separated by a distance of
vt 1 2 1 2
1) 2) gt 3) vt 4) vt gt
2 2 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 18
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Multi Correct Choice Type:
11. The distance travelled by a freely falling body is directly proportional to
1) the mass of the body 2) the acceleration due to gravity.
3) the square of the time of fall 4) the time of fall
12. For a freely falling body
1. intial velocity is zero
2. Acceleration is positive
3. On reaching the ground it’s velocity is 2gh
2u
4. Time in which it reaches the ground is
g
13. A body is falling under gravity, then the distance covered
1) in 1st second of its motion is 4.9m
2) in 2nd second of its motion is 14.7m
3) in 3rd second of its motion is 24.5m
4) in 4th second of its motion is 34.3 m
Statement Type:
14. Statement I : A body falling freely moves with constant velocity.
Statement II: The body falls freely, when acceleration of the body is equal to
acceleration due to gravity.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement I.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Comprehension Type:
When a body is dropped freely it accelerates.
15. A stone released with zero velocity from the top of a tower reaches the ground in
4 second, the height of the tower is about [g = 10ms –2]
1) 20 m 2) 40 m 3) 80 m 4) 160 m
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 19
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
16. Take the uniform acceleration near the surface of earth to be 9.8ms–2 for a free fall.
What is the velocity of a body at the end of two second of free fall, if the initial
velocity is zero? ( g = 9.8m/s2)
1) 9.8ms–1 2) 19.6 ms–1 3) 29.4 ms–1 4) 4.9 ms–1
17. How far a stone shall free fall in 1 second released from rest? ( g = 9.8m/s2)
1) 4.9m 2) 9.8m 3) 19.6m 4) 29.4 m
Matrix Match Type:
18. For a freely falling body, match the following
Column -I Column-II
2h
a) Velocity of the body on reaching the ground is 1)
g
b) Distance travelled by the body is in ‘t’ sec is 2) gt
1 2
c) velocity of the body after a time ‘t’ sec is 3) gt
2
d) time (t) taken by a body t0 reach the ground is 4) 2gh
5) 2g
19. For a freely falling body, match the following
Column -I Column-II
a) V = gt p) Distance travelled by the body is 3rd sec.
1 2
b) S= gt q) velocity of body on reaching the ground
2
c) V 2gh r) Distance travelled by the body in ‘t’ sec.
5g
d) S3 s) velocity of body after time ‘t’ sec
2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 20
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
MOTION_SYNOPSIS-3
Body projected vertically upwards: Whenever a body is projected vertically up-
wards, then a = –g. The equations of motion for a body projected vertically upwards
are:
1 2 g
a) v u gt b) s or h ut gt c) v2 u2 2gh d) sn u (2n 1)
2 2
Whenever a body is projected vertically upwards: velocity becomes zero at the
highest point.
i) Maximum height : The vertical distance travelled by a body before its velocity
becomes zero is called maximum height reached by the body.
If a body is projected vertically upwards with a velocity 'u', the maximum height (h)
u2
reached by the body is h . Where g = acceleration due to gravity.
2g
ii) Time of ascent : Time taken by the body to reach the highest point is called
u
time of ascent ( ta )and is given by ta g
iii) Time of descent : Time taken by the body to travel from the maximum height
u
to the ground is called time of descent ( t d) is given by td g .
In the absence of air resistance, time of ascent is equal to time of descent.
iv) Time of flight : The total time spent by the body in air is called time of flight
u u 2u
(t) is given by t = ta+td= g g g .
Note: If 'u' is the velocity with which a body is projected vertically upwards and 'v'
is the velocity with which the body reaches the point of projection, then v = u.
1 2 1
Vertical projection of an object from a tower: h ut gt or h gt 2 ut
2 2
*3. Sign convention: Normally we take vertically upward direction positive (and
downward negative) and horizontally rightwards positive (or leftwards negative)
(a) Sign convention for motion in vertical direction
+Ve –Ve
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 21
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
(b) Sign convention for motion in horizontal direction -Ve
+Ve
Velocity on reaching the ground:
When a body is dropped from a height h, its initial velocity is zero. Let the final
velocity on reaching the ground be v. For a freely falling body,
v2 – u2 = 2gh, but u = 0 therefore,v2 – 0 = 2gh or v 2gh ____________
(10)
Further, in case of a body thrown upwards, we have for initial velocity.
______________
u 2gh (11)
Comparing equation (10) and (11), we conclude that the velocity of the body falling
from height h, on reaching the ground is equal to the velocity with which it is
projected vertically upwards to reach the same height h.
The upwards velocity at any point in its flight is the same as its downward velocity
at that point.
Body projected vertically up from the top of a tower
1. If a body is projected vertically up from the top of a tower of height ‘h’ with
velocity ‘u’.
1 2
a) Displacement after time t is S ut gt
2
1 2
b) If it reaches the ground after time t, then h ut gt
2
c) Its velocity on reaching the ground is u 2 2gh
d) Its maximum height above the ground is h
u
2g 2
MOTION_WORKSHEET-3
1. When a body projected vertically upwards its velocity is at the highest
point is ______.
1) non-zero 2) infinite 3) zero 4) one
2. The Time of flight is equal to the sum of _______.
1) time of ascent and velocity 2) time of ascent and time of descent
3) time of descent and velocity 4) time of ascent and maximum height
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 22
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
3. The velocity with which a body is thrown upwards is _____ to the velocity with
which the body reaches the ground.
1) equal 2) double
3) three times equal 4) four times equal
4. If a body is thrown up then the acceleration due to gravity is taken as _______.
1) equal 2) negative 3) positive 4) infinity
5. When a body is projected vertically upwards, it’s velocity is
1) Increases 2 Decreases 3. Remains same 4. Can’t say
6. When a body is projected vertically upwards, the direction of acceleration is
1. Upwards 2 downwards 3. Both 1 & 2 4. Neither 1 nor 2
7. A body is projected vertically up and after some time it reaches the point of
projection. In this case
1. Distance travelled and it’s displacemenet both are zero
2. Distance travelled is zero but not displacement
3. Distance travelled= Displacement
4. Distance travelled is not zero but displacement is zero
8. A body is projected vertically up from the ground on reaching the greatest height
1.It’s velocity is zero and acceleration is not zero
2.It’s velocity is not zero and acceleration is zero
3. Both velocity and acceleration is not zero
4.Both velocity and acceleration is zero
9. A body is projected up from the ground, Distance travelled by it in the last second
of it’s upward journey is
1. More if the initial velocity is more 2. More if the initial velocity is less
3. Independent of the initial velocity 4. can’t say
10. At the maximum height of a body thrown vertically up
1) Velocity is not zero but acceleration is zero.
2) Acceleration is not zero but velocity is zero.
3) Both acceleration and velocity is zero.
4) Both acceleration and velocity are not zero.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 23
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
11. To reach the same height on the moon as on the earth, a body must be projected
up with
1) Higher velocity on the moon.
2) Lower velocity on the moon.
3) Same velocity on the moon and earth.
4) It depends on the mass of the body.
12. B1 , B2 and B3 are three balloons ascending with velocities v, 2v and 3v respectively.
If a bomb is dropped from each when they are at the same height,if T1 , T2 and T3
are the times taken by the bombs while reaching the ground. Then
1) T1 T2 T3 2) T1 T2 T3 3) T1 T2 T3 4) T2 T1 T3
13. B 1, B2 and B3 are three balloons ascending with velocities v, 2v and 3v, respectively.
If a bomb is dropped from each when they are at the same height, then
1) bomb from B1 reaches ground first
2) bomb from B2 reaches ground first
3) bomb from B3 reaches ground first
4) they reach the ground simultaneously
14. A person standing near the edge of the top of a building throws two balls A and B.
The ball A is thrown vertically upward and B is thrown vertically downward with
the same speed, The ball A hits the ground with a speed VA and the ball B hits
the ground with a speed VB . then
1) VA VB 2) VA VB 3) VA VB
4) the relation between VA and VB depends on height of the building above the
ground
15. The time taken by a vertically projected body before reaching the ground is
1) directly proportional to initial velocity.
2) directly proportional to square of initial velocity.
3) inversely proportional to square of initial velocity.
4) inversely proportional to initial velocity.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 24
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A stone is projected vertically upwards with a velocity 10 m/s. Find the maximum
height reached by the body. (take g 10m /s2 .)
1) 5m 2) 10m 3) 15m 4) 20m
2. A body is thrown vertically upwards and rises to a maximum height of 5m. The
velocity with which the body was thrown upwards is (take g 10m /s2 )
1) 15 m/s 2)10 m/s 3) 20 m/s 4) 40 m/s
3. A body is projected vertically upwards with a velocity of 9.8 m/s. The total time for
which the body will remain in the air is ______ (take g 9.8m /s 2 )
1) 2 sec 2) 3 sec 3) 1 sec 4) 0.5 sec
4. A body is projected vertically upwards with a velocity 19.6 m/s, its time of ascent
is = ____ ( g 9.8m /s 2 )
1) 3 sec 2) 4 sec 3) 2 sec 4) 1 sec
5. A body projected vertically up reaches a maximum height of 9.8m. Its time of flight is
1) 4s 2) 2s 3) 2s 4) 2 2 s
6. A pebble is thrown vertically upwards with a speed of 20ms–1. How high will it be
after 2seconds? (Take g = 10ms–2)
1) 20m 2) 30m 3) 40m 4) 60m
7. A ball thrown vertically upwards with an initial velocity of 1.4 m/s returns in 2 s.
The total displacement of the ball is
1) 22.4 cm 2) zero 3) 44.8 m 4) 33.6m
8. A stone thrown vertically up from the ground reaches a maximum height of 50m
in 10s. Time taken by the stone to reach the ground from maximum height is
1) 5s 2) 10s 3) 20s 4) 25s
9. A body is projected vertically up with a speed of 20m/s. The distance travelled by
it is 3 sec is
1. 5 m 2 15 m 3. 20 m 4 25 m
10. A body is projected vertically up and total distance travelled by it is S. Then total
time of it’s flight will be
s 2s 4s 8s
1. 2 3. 4.
g g g g
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 25
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
11. A body is projected vertically up from the top of a tower with 19.6 m/s takes 5sec
to reach the ground. Then height of the tower is
1. 44.1 m 2. 24.5 m 3. 39.2 m 4. 19.6 m
12. From the top of a tower a body is projectd vertically up with a velocity of 4.9 m/s.
The time after which it will pass through the point of projectopm is
1. 1sec 2. 2sec 3. 4sec 4. 6sec
Multi Correct Choice Type:
13. Pickup the correct statement.
1) A body is projected vertically upwards at maximum height v = 0 and a 0
2) A body is projected vertically upwards at maximum height v 0 and a 0
3) A body is projected vertically upwards other than maximum height along its
path v 0 and a 0 .
4) A body is projected vertically upwards other than maximum height along its
path v = 0 and a = 0.
14. A particle is projected vertically upward with velocity u from a point A, when it
returns to point of projection
1) Its average speed is u /2 2) Its average velocity is zero
3) Its displacement is zero 4) Its average speed is u
Statement Type:
15. Statement I : A body is projected vertically upwards then its velocity gradually
decreases.
Statement II : A body is projected vertically upward then its acceleration gradually
increases.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement I.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
16. Statement – I : Two balls of different masses are thrown vertically upward with
the same speed. They will pass through their point of projection in the downward
direction with the same speed.
Statement– II : The maximum height and downward velocity attained at the point
of projection are dependent on the mass of the ball.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement I.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 26
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Comprehension Type:
Whenever a body is projected vertically upwards, its velocity decreases.
17. A body is projected vertically upwards with a velocity 40m/s. The maximum height
reached by the body. [g = 10m/s2]
1) 80m 2) 20m 3) 30m 4) 40m
18. A body is thrown vertically upwards and rises to a maximum height of 10m. The
velocity with which the body was thrown upwards is (g = 9.8m/s2)
1) 10m/s 2) 14m/s 3) 20m/s 4) 18m/s
19. A ball is thrown vertically upwards. It returns 6seconds later. The greatest height
reached by ball is (g = 10ms–2)
1) 90m 2) 70m 3) 20m 4) 45m
Matrix Match Type:
20. If the body projected vertically upwards, Then match the following:
Column -I Column-II
2u2
a) Maximum height reached by the body 1)
g
u
b) time of ascent 2)
g
2u
c) time of descent 3)
g
u2
d) time of flight 4)
2g
5) depends on the initial velocity
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 27
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
KINEMATICS_SINOPSIS-4
1. Graphs
i) A linear equation between x and y represents a straight line between x and y,
e.g. y = 4x –2, y = 5x + 3, 3x = y–2 equations represent straight line on x–y graph.
To draw the straight line find x–intercept and y–intercept. Joining these two
intercepts will give the graph of straight line.
For example to draw the graph of y = 4x–2. Find x–intercept and y–intercept. To
find x–intercept put y = 0 in the given equation i.e., 4x – 2 = 0 4x = 2 x = 2
and to find y – intercept put x = 0 in the given equation i.e., y = 4(0) – 2 y = –2
Join these two intercepts to get the required graph of straight line as shown.
2 X
-2
ii) x y or y = kx represents a straight line passing through origin.
iii) The graph of y = k (constant) is a straight line parallel to x – axis.
iv) The graph of x = k (constant) is a straight line parallel to y – axis.
1
v) x represents a rectangular hyperbola in x–y graph. Shape of rectangular
y
hyperbola is as shown in figure
vi) A quadratic equation in x and y represents a parabola in x–y graph, e.g.,
y = 3x 2+2, y2 = 4x, x 2 = y–2 equations represent parabola in x–y graph. The shape
of parabola of form y = kx 2 where k is a constant is as shown in the figure.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 28
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
dy y
2.If z or , then the value of z at any point on x-y graph can be obtained by the
dx x
slope of the graph at that point.
For example, for one dimensional motion
ds
a) slope of displacement–time graph gives velocity as v .
dt
dv
b) slope of velocity–time graph gives acceleration as a .
dt
3. If z = yx or y(dx) or x(dy), then the value of z between x1 and x2 or between y1 and y2
can be obtained by the area of graph between x 1 and x2 or y1 and y2.
For example, for one dimensional motion
a) area under velocity–time graph gives displacement (as ds = v dt).
b) area under acceleration–time graph gives change in velocity (as dv = a dt).
Note: Go through these points after completing the work sheet.
1 Slopes of v-t or s–t graphs can never be infinite at any point, because infinite slope of v–t
graph means infinite acceleration. Similarly, infinite slope of s-t graph means
infinite velocity. Hence, the following graphs are not possible:
v s
t t
2. At one time, two values of velocity or displacement are not possible. Hence, the
following graphs are not acceptable:
v s
v1 s1
v2 s2
t t
t0 t0
3. Different values of displacements in s–t graph corresponding to given v–t graph can
be calculated just by calculating areas under v–t graph. There is no need of using
equations like v = u + at etc.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 29
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
KINEMATICS_WORKSHEET-4
1. If displacement - time graph is parallel to time axis, then body is ____
1) Uniform velocity 2) Stationary
3) Variable acceleration 4) Variable velocity
2. If the velocity - time graph is parallel to time axis, then body is moving with
1) Uniform velocity 2) Stationary
3) Variable velocity 4) Variable acceleration
3. If displacement-time graph is a curve, the body is moving with a _____
1) Uniform velocity 2) Stationary
3) Variable acceleration 4) Variable velocity
4. If the velocity-time graph is a curve, then body has
1) Variable acceleration 2) Stationary
3) Variable velocity 4) both (1) and (3)
5. If the velocity-time graph is a curve, then area under the curve represents ____
1) velocity 2) displacement 3) acceleration 4) all of these
6. If displacement - time graph is a straight line, then body is moving with
1) Uniform Velocity 2) Stationary
3) Variable Velocity 4) Variable acceleration
7. If Velocity - time graph is a straight line but moving away from velocity - time
axis, then body is
1) moving with variable velocity 2) moving with uniform velocity
3) moving with stationary 4) displacement
8. If acceleration - time graph, parallel to time axis from figure
Acceleration
in (m/s2)
8
6
A B
4
2
1 2 3 4
Time in (seconds)
1) body is moving with a uniform velocity 2) Acceleration change
3) body is moving with a uniform acceleration 4) all of these
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 30
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
9. Which of the following cannot be the distance (x)- time (t) graph ?
x x
1) 2) 3) x 4)
x
t t t
t
10. The figure given here shows the velocity-time graph of a one-dimensional motion.
Which of the following characteristics of the particle is represented by the shaded
area ?
velocity
time
1) Velocity 2) Acceleration 3) Displacement 4) Speed
11. Ch oose t h e cor r ect st at em en t :
1) Th e ar ea of di splacem en t - t im e gr aph gives velocit y.
2) Th e slop e of velocit y - t im e gr aph gives acceler at ion .
3) Th e slope of displacem en t - t im e gr aph gives acceler at ion .
4) Th e ar ea of velocit y - t im e gr aph gives aver age velocit y.
12. Velocit y-t im e gr aph of a body t h r own ver t ically u p is
1) a st r aigh t lin e 2) a par ab ola
3) a h yper bola 4 ) ci r cl e
13. Velocit y - displacem en t gr aph of a fr eely fall in g bod y is
1) St r aigh t lin e p assin g t h r ou gh t h e or igin
2) St r aigh t lin e in t er est i n g ‘x’ an d ‘y’ axes
3) Par abola 4) H yper b ola
14. D isp lacem en t - t im e gr aph of a body pr oject ed ver t ically u p is
1) a st r aigh t l in e 2) a par ab ola 3) a h yper bola 4) a cir cle
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 31
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
15. If the distance travelled by a particle and corresponding time be laid off along y
and x axes respectively, then the correct statement of the following is
1) the curve may lie in fourth quadrant
2) the curve lies in first quadrant
3) the curve exhibits peaks corresponding to maxima
4) the curve may drop as time passes
16. In relation to a velocity - time graph
1) the curve can be a circle
2) the area under the curve and above the time axis between any two instants
gives the average acceleration
3) the slope at any instant gives the rate of change of acceleration at that instant
4) the area under the curve and above the time axis gives the displacement
17. The displacement - time graph of a particle moving with respect to a fixed point is
a straight line
1) the object is stationary with zero velocity
2) the acceleration of the object is zero
3) body moves with unifrom velocity
4) All the above
18. For a uniform motion
1) the velocity - time graph is a straight line parallel to time axis
2) the position - time graph is a parabola
3) the acceleration - time graph is a straight line inclined with time axis
4) the position - time graph is a straight line
19. Figure shows the displacement- time graph of a particle moving on the x-axis
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 32
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
1) the paritcle is continuously going in positive X direction
2) the particle is at rest
3) the velocity increases up to a time t0 and then becomes constant.
4) the particle moves at constant velocity up to a time t0 and then stops.
20. The position time (x-t) graphs for two children A and B returning from their
school to their homes P and Q respectively are shown in figure. Choose the
correct entries in the below.
Q A
B
P
a) A lives closer to the school than B
b) B starts from the school earlier than A
c) A walks faster than B
d) A and B reach home at the same time
e) B over takes A on the road once
1) a,d,e 2) b,c 3) c 4) a,b,c
21. Shape of displacement - time graph for a body projected vertically up.
1) Curve with constant slope 2) Curve with positive slope
3) Curve with decreasing slope 4) Curve with increasing slope
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 33
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. The velocity-time graph of a body moving in astraight line is shown in the figure.
the body moving in 0 to 2sec is
5
4
3
2
1 2 4 6
0
1 1 3 5
2
3
t(sec)
1) uniform velocity 2) uniform accelearation 3) zero velocity 4) all are correct
2. The velocity-time graph of a body moving in astraight line is shown in the figure.
the body moving in 4 to 6sec is
5
4
3
2
V(m/s)
1 2 4 6
0
1 1 3 5
2
3
t(sec)
1) uniform velocity 2) uniform accelearation 3) zero velocity 4) all are correct
3. If velocity - time graph has negative slope, then body has
1) Negative acceleration 2) Positive acceleration
3) Zero acceleration 4) Both 1 and 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 34
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
4. If velocity - time graph has positive slope, then body has
1) Negative acceleration 2) Positive acceleration
3) Zero acceleration 4) Both 1 and 2
5. The displacement - time graphs of two bodies A and B are OP and OQ respectively.
If POX is 600 and QOX is 450, the ratio of the velocity of A to that of B is
P
y
Q
O t x
1) 3: 2 2) 3 :1 3) 1: 3 4) 3:1
6. The variation of quantity A with quantity B. plotted in Fig. describes the motion
of a particle in a straight line.
a) Quantity B may represent time.
b) Quantity A is velocity if motion is uniform.
c) Quantity A is displacement if motion is uniform.
d) Quantity A is velocity if motion is uniformly accelerated.
B
1) a,c,d 2) b,c,d 3) a,b 4) c,d
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 35
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
7. The x-t graph shown in figure represents
Displacement
t1
Time
1. constant velocity
2. velocity of the body is continuously changing.
3. instantaneous velocity
4. the body travels with constant speed upto time t1 and then stops
8. Which of the following velocity time graphs is NOT possible
v v v v
1) 2) 3) 4)
t t t t
9. The velocity-time graph of a body moving in astraight line is shown in the figure.
The displacement and distance travelled by the body in 6 sec are respectively.
5
4
3
2
V(m/s)
1 2 4 6
0
1 1 3 5
2
3
t(sec)
1. 8 m,16 m 2. 16 m,8 m 3. 16 m,16 m 4. 8 m,8 m
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 36
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
10. If velocity - time graph is parallel to time axis
1) Both will be moving with uniform velocity
2) Body has zero acceleration
3) Its displacement can be found by finding the area of the graph.
4) Slope of graph will be zero
Statement Type:
11. Statement I : The slope of displacement – time graph gives velocity.
Statement II : The area covered under velocity – time graph gives displacement.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement I.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Comprehension Type:
50
A B
40
velocity (m/s)
30
20
10
C
0
10 20 30 40 50
Time (s)
The velocity – time graph of a car given above and solve the given questions.
12. what is the acceleration of car from O to A ?
1) 2 m/s2 2) 4 m/s2 3) 6 m/s2 4) 0.5m/s2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 37
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 38
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
MOTION_WORKSHEET-1_KEY
1. 4 2. 1 3. 3 4. 1 5. 2
6. 3 7. 4 8. 1 9. 3 10. 4
11. 3 12. 2 13. 3 14. 2 15. 3
16. 3 17. 1 18. 3 19. 3 20. 2 21. 1
JEE MAINS
1. 1 2. 4 3. 2 4. 3 5. 2
6. 1 7. 2 8. 2 9. 1 10. 3
11. 2 12. 2 13. 2,4 14. 1,2 15. 1,2,4
16. 1,2,3 17. 2 18. 1 19. 3 20. 1
21. 3 22. a-4;b-1;c-3;d-5
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS:
1. A player takes 40s to complete one revolution of a circular path.
Here 2 minutes 20s = 140s
140 7
Let n is the number of revolution he made n = 3)5
40 2
that means he made three and half revolutions in 140seconds. So, he reached the
opposite of the starting point in a circle of radius ‘r’
So, the displacement is r + r = 2r.
O
A B
2. Displacement x 2 y 2 102 202 500 22.36 km
4. 2R:R or 2 : ; 5. S R 2 R 2 2 R 6. S = vt
total displacement change in velocity
7. Average velocity= total time 8. a=
time
total distance travelled S1 S2 S3
10. Average speed, = total time taken
t1 t 2 t 3
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 39
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
Let ‘s’ the total distance travelled and let t 1 time taken for 1 st one third distance,
s/3
with velocity of 1ms –1) t1 s/3 ___________
(1)
1
Let t2 be the time taken for 2nd one third distance with a velocity of 2ms –1)
s/3
t2 s/6 ____________
(2)
2
Let t3 be the time taken for next one third distance with a velocity of 3ms –1)
s/3
t3 s/9 _____________
(3)
3
s s
Vave s 1 18
t1 t 2 t 3 s s s –1
1 1 1 11/18 11 = 1)64 ms
3 6 9 s
3 6 9
11. I Total Displacement V1t V2t V1 V2
Average Velocity
Total time taken tt 2
Total Displacement ss 2V1V2
II. Average Velocity
Total time taken s s V1 V2
V1 V2
distance 1.2km 1200m
12. Distance = Speed × time time = = 80s
speed 15ms 1 15ms 1
dv
15. a , If velocity changes, definiety there will be acceleration. If speed
dt
changes, then velocity also changes, so definietely there will be acceleration.
Acceleration may be due to change in the direction of velocity only and not
magnitude.
If body has acceleration, its speed may changes if acceleration is due to change
in magnitude of velocity.
19. Let the cyclist start from point X.radius of circle OX = r (given)
O r X
Distance covered by cyclist = Circumference of circle (once) = 2 r
Initial position of cyclist = X. After one revolution, final position = X
Since initial position and final position are same displacement is zero.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 40
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
1
20. Distance covered = Half of the circumference of circle = × 2r = r
2
Y r r X
O
Initial position = X, final position = Y Magnitude of displacement XY = ?
From figure XY = XO + OY= r + r = 2r.
21. Distance covered by cyclist
Z
r
r X
O
1 1 r
= Quadrant of circle = × Circumference of circle = × 2r =
4 4 2
Initial position = X Final position = Z; Magnitude of displacement = XZ = ?
Consider right triangle OXZ, we have from pythagorus theorem,
2 2 2 2
XZ = OX OZ = r r = 2r 2 = 2r
MOTION_WORKSHEET-2_KEY
CUQ:1. 3 2. 1 3. 1 4. 1 5. 2 6. 1 7. 3 8. 1
9. 3 10. 4 11. 3 12. 1 13. 2 14.1
JEE MAINS
1. 1 2. 1 3.2 4. 3 5. 1 6. 1 7. 2 8. 4
9. 3 10. 3 11. 2,3 12. 3 13.1,2,3,4 14.4 15. 3
16. 2 17. 1 18. a-2,4;b-3;c-2;d-1 19. a-4;b-3;c-2;d-1
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS:
9. The acceleration of a freely falling body does not depend upon the mass of the
body.
10. Using v2 – u2 = 2as, we get v2 = 2gh v 2gh
1 2 1
14. h= gt = × 9.8 × 3 × 3 = 44.1 m
2 2
16. Given, g 10 ms 1 and h=20 m; We have v 2 gh
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 41
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
MOTION_WORKSHEET-3_KEY
1. 3 2. 2 3. 1 4. 2 5. 2 6. 2 7.4
8. 1 9. 3 10.2 11.2 12. 1 13. 1 14. 3
JEE MAINS
1.1 2. 2 3. 1 4. 3 5. 4 6. 1 7.2
` 8. 2 9. 4 10.3 11.2 12. 1 13.1,3 14. 1,2,3
15. 3 16. 3 17. 1 18. 2 19. 4 20.a-4,5;b-2,5;c-2,5;d-3,5
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS
6. u = 20ms–1, g = 10ms–2, t = 2s, h = ?
1 1
h = ut gt2 = 20 × 2 × 10 × (2)2 = 40 – 20 = 20m.
2 2
7. displacement = shortest distance between initial point and final point
2
h 2 4
8. time of ascent = time of descent 17. hmax u2 ;
h' 3 9
14. For vertically projected body, if it returns to the starting point, displacement
and average velocity become zero. As acceleration is constant, average speed
during upward or downward motion is u 0 / 2 u / 2 . The same will be the
average speed for the whole motion.
17. velocity after 5s = 0 + 2 × 5 = 10m/s
1 2 1 2
18. height upto this point at 2 5 25m
2 2
02 102
20. further height travelled by the body after 5s. 5m
2g
Total height = 25 + 5 = 30m
Total time = time taken from A to B + time taken from B to max ht (C) and then to
the ground.
t = 5 + tl. How to get tl ? s = +25m, u = 10m/s, t = tl = ?, g = 10m/s2.
1 2 2 2
25 = 10tl × 10 × t| |
25 = 10tl – 5 t 5 = 2tl – t
|
2
On solving this we get, tl 1 6s total time t = 5 + 1 + 6 6 6s
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 42
CLASS IX-PHYSICS MOTION
MOTION_WORKSHEET-4_KEY
1. 2 2. 1 3. 4 4. 4 5. 2 6. 1 7. 1 8. 3
9. 2 10. 3 11. 2 12. 1 13. 3 14. 2 15. 2 16. 4
17. 4 18. 1 19. 4 20. 1 21. 3
JEE MAINS
1. 1 2. 1 3. 1 4. 2 5. 2 6. 1 7. 4 8. 1
9. 1 10. 1,2,3,4 11. 2 12. 2 13. 4 14. 2
15. a-1;b-2;c-3;d-4
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS
9. Area of V t graph gives distance
40
10. The slope of velocity - time graph gives acceleration. acceleration = 4m /s2
10
11. Car moves with uniform velocity from A to B. So, the acceleration becomes zero.
40
12. Retardation = 2m /s2
20
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 43
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
MEMO GRAPH
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
Newton’s I law Newton’s II law Newton’s III law
Inertia Fnet ma Conservation of
linear momentum
Inertia Inertia Inertia
of of of
rest motion direction
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 44
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
KNOW YOUR SCIENTIST
Galileo Galilei (1564 - 1642)
Galileo Galilei was a key figure in the scientific revolution
in Europe about four centuries ago. Galileo proposed the
concept of acceleration. From experiments on motion of
bodies on inclined planes or falling, freely, he contradicted
the Aristotelian notion that a force was required to keep a
body in motion and that heavier bodies fall faster than lighter
bodies under gravity. He thus arrived at the law of inertia
that was the starting point of the subsequent epochal work
Galileo Galilei of Isaac Newton. Newton brought out another masterpiece
(1564 - 1642) optics that summarized his work on light and colour.
Issac Netwon (1643 - 1727)
In 1684, encouraged by his friend Edmund Halley, Netwon embarked on
wring what was to be The principia Mathematica was one of the greatest
scientific works ever published. He enunciated all three laws of motion
and the universal law of gravitation, which explained all the three
Kepler’s laws of planetary motion. The book was packed with a host of
path - breaking achievements: basic principles of fluid mechanics,
mathematics of wave motion, calculation of masses of the earth, the
sun and other planets, explanation of the precession of equinoxes, the
tides, etc. Newton brought out another masterpiece Opticks that
summarized his work on light and colour.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 45
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
SYNOPSIS-1
Isaac Newton (a 17th century scientist) put forth a variety of laws that explain
why objects move (or don't move) as they do. These three laws have become
known as Newton's three laws of motion.
Inertia :
* It is the inability of a body to change its state of rest or of uniform motion or its
direction by itself.
* Mass is a measure of inertia in translatory motion
* Heavier the mass, larger the inertia & vice–versa.
Types of inertia: There are three types of inertia. (i) Inertia of rest (ii) Inertia
of motion and (iii)Inertia of direction.
* Inertia of rest: It is the inability of a body to change its state of rest by itself .
Ex:When a bus is at rest and starts suddenly moving forward the passengers
inside it will fall back.
Inertia of motion: It is the inability of a body to change its state of uniform
motion by itself.
Ex: Passengers in a moving bus fall forward, when brakes are applied suddenly.
Inertia of direction: It is the inability of a body to change its direction of motion
by itself .
Ex:When a bus takes a turn, passengers in it experience an outward force.
* A person sitting in a moving train, throws a coin vertically upwards, then
i) it falls behind him, if the train is accelerating
ii) it falls infront of him, if the train is retarding
iii) it falls into the hand of the person, if the train is moving with uniform velocity.
iv) It falls into the hand of the person if the train is at rest
Newton's First Law ( law of Inertia)
* Every body continues to be in its state of rest (or) uniform motion in a straight
line unless it is acted upon by a net external force to change its state
* It defines inertia, force and mechanical equilibrium.
* If the net external force on an object is zero , then acceleration of object is zero.
Linear momentum :
* Linear momentum is the product of the mass of a body and its velocity. p mv
* Linear momentum is a vector.It has the same direction as the direction of velocity
of the body. SI unit: kg m s-1 , CGS unit: g cm s-1
* Dimensional Formula : [MLT-1 ]
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 46
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
Change in momentum of a body in different cases :
* Con si der a body of m ass m moving with velocity vi and momentum Pi . Due to a
collision (or) due to the action of a force on it suppose its velocity changes to v f
and momentum changes to Pf in a small time interval t .
Change in momentum of body = P Pf Pi
Where Pi initial momentum Pf final momentum P mv f mvi
P Pf Pi Pf2 Pi 2 2 Pf Pi cos where = angle between Pf and Pi
Newton's second law:
* The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the resultant
(or) net external force acting on the body and takes place along the direction of
force.
m v m u m( v u )
* F
t t
* Force is a vector and the acceleration produced in the body is in the direction of
net force,
* SI unit : newton (N). CGS unit : dyne.
* One newton = 105 dyne.
* Dimensional Formulae= =[MLT-2]
Gravitational units of force: Kilogram weight (kg wt) and gram weight (g wt);
1 kg.wt = 9.8 N, 1 gm.wt= 980 dyne.
Newton's third law:
* For every action there is always an equal and opposite reaction
* Action and reaction do not act on the same body and they act on different bodies
at same instant of time
* Action and reaction, known as pair of forces, are equal in magnitude and opposite
in directions acting on different bodies in interaction. So they never cancel each
other.
Examples:
* When we walk on a road we push the road backwards and road applies equal (in
magnitude) and opposite force on us, so that we can move forward.
* When we swim on water we push water backward and water applies equal (in
magnitude) and opposite force on us,so that we can move forward.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 47
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
WORKSHEET-1
1. The behaviour of a body under zero resultantforce is given by
1) First law of motion 2) Second law of motion
3) Third law of motion 4) Law of gravitation
2. You move forward when your car suddenly comes to a halt and you are thrown
backward when your car rapidly accelerates. Which law of Newtons is involved
in these?
1) third law 2) second law 3) first law 4) law of gravitation
3. You are thrown outer side when your car suddenly takes a turn. Which law of Newton
is involved in this?
1) third law 2) second law 3) first law 4) law of gravitation
4. An object is thrown vertically upward with some velocity. If gravity is turned off
at the instant the object reaches the maximum height, what happens?
1) the object continues to move in a straight line
2) the object will be at rest
3) the object falls back with uniform velocity
4) the object falls back with uniform acceleration
5. Which of the following is the most significant law of motion given by Newton?
1) First law of motion 2) Second law of motion
3) Third law of motion 4) Zeroth law of motion
6. The quantity of motion of a body is best represented by
1) its mass 2) its speed 3) its velocity 4) its linear momentum
7. A certain particle undergoes erratic motion. At every point in its motion, the
direction of the particle’s momentum is always
1) the same as the direction of its velocity
2) the same as the direction of its acceleration
3) the same as the direction of its net force
4) the same as the direction of its kinetic energy
8. To keep a particle moving with constant velocity on a frictionless surface,
an external force
1) should act continuously 2) should be a variable force
3) not necessary 4) should act opposite to the direction of motion
9. If action force acting on a body is gravitational in nature, then reaction force
1) may be a contact force 2) may be gravitational force
3) may be a gravitational or contact force 4) may be a force of any origin
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 48
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
10. Action and reaction can never balance out because
1) they are equal but not opposite always
2) they are unequal in magnitude even though opposite in direction
3) though they are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction they act on
different bodies
4) they are unequal in magnitudes
11. You hold a rubber ball in your hand. The Newton’s third law companion force to
the force of gravity on the ball is the force exerted by the
1) ball on the earth 2) ball on the hand
3) hand on the ball 4) earth on the ball
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A constant force (F) is applied on a stationary particle of mass ‘m’. The velocity
attained by the particle in a certain displacement will be proportional to
1
1) m 2) 1/m 3) m 4)
m
2. A constant force (F) is applied on a stationary particle of mass ‘m’. The velocity
attained by the particle in a certain interval of time will be proportional to
1
1) m 2) 1/m 3) m 4)
m
3. A force produces an acceleration of a1 in a body and the same force produces an
acceleration of a2 in another body. If the two bodies are combined and the same
force is applied on the combination, the acceleration produced in it is
a1 a2 a1a2
1) a1 a2 2) 3) 4) a1a2
a1a2 a1 a2
4. n balls each of mass m impinge elastically in each second on a surface with
velocity u. The average force experienced by the surface will
be
1) mnu 2) 2mnu 3) 4mnu 4) mnu/2
5. A ball reaches a racket at 60 m/s along + X direction, and leaves the racket in the
opposite direction with the same speed. Assuming that the mass of the ball as
50gm and the contact time is 0.02 second, the force exerted by the racket on
the ball is
1) 300 N along + X direction 2) 300 N along - X direction
3) 3,00,000 N along + X direction 4) 3,00,000 N along - X direction
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 49
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
6. 'P' and 'Q' horizontally push in the same direction a 1200 kg crate. 'P' pushes with
a force of 500 newton and 'Q' pushes with a force of 300 newton. If a frictional
force provides 200 newton of resistance, what is the acceleration of the crate?
1) 1.3 m / s 2 2) 1.0 m / s 2 3) 0.75 m / s 2 4) 0.5 m / s 2
7. A ball of mass 'm' moves normal to a wall with a velocity 'u' and rebounds with a
velocity 'v'. The change in momentum of the ball during the rebounding is
1) m u v towards the wall 2) m u v towards the wall
3) m u v away from the wall 4) m u v away from the wall.
8. If a force of 250N acts on a body,the momentum required is 125kgms 1 .The period
for which the force acts on the body is
1) 0.1 s 2) 0.3 s 3) 0.5 s 4) 0.2 s
9. A machine gun fires a bullet of mass 40g with a velocity 1200 ms–1 . The man
holding it can exert a maximum force of 144 N on the gun. How many bullets
can he fire per second at the most?
1) One 2) Three 3) Two 4) Four
10. A truck of mass 500kg is moving with constant speed 10 ms 1 .If sand is dropped
into the truck at the constant rate
10kg/min,the force required to maintain the motion with constant velocity is
3 5 7 5
1) N 2) N 3) N 4) N
2 4 5 3
11. A 5000 kg rocket is set for vertical firing. The exhaust speed is 800ms 1 . To give
an upward acceleration of 20ms 2 , the amount of gas ejected per second to supply
the needed thrust is g 10ms
2
1) 127.5 kg s 1 2) 137.5 kg s 1 3) 187.5 kg s 1 4) 185.5 kg s 1
12. A 0.2 kg object at rest is subjected to a force 0.3iˆ 0.4 ˆj N . What is its velocity
vector after 6 sec
1) 9iˆ 12 ˆj
2) 8iˆ 16 ˆj
3) 12iˆ 9 ˆj
4) 16iˆ 8 ˆj
Multi Correct Choice Type:
13. Force effects
1) A stationary object into motion 2) A moving body to stop
3) Direction of moving body 4) Dimensions of the body
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 50
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
Reasoning Type:
14. Statement I : When a carpet suddenly jerked, the dust flies off.
Statement II : The tendency of a body to continue in its state of rest , even when
some external force is applied on it is called inertia of rest
1) Both Statements are true,Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
2) Both Statements are true,Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement I.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true
15. Pickup the correct statements from the following:
a) Force is not required to keep a body moving with uniform velocity on surface
b) During the motion of a body it moves with uniform velocity
c) In the absence of a force the body moves with uniform velocity
d) Internal forces cannot impart any motion to the body
1) a,b are true 2) c,d are true 3)a,c are true 4)b,d are true
16. Identify the correct statements in the following
a) Inertia is defined with the help of Newtons Ist law of motion
b) Newton’s 2nd law helps us to measure the force
c) A body in rotation posseses inertia
d) mass is the measure of inertia
1) a,b & c are true 2) b,c & d are true
3) c,d & a are true 4) a,b,c & d are true
17. Pick out the examples of inertia of rest in the following.
a) Ripen fruits can be made to fall by moving violently the branch
b) When a moving bus is stopped suddenly the passengers fall forward.
c) A coin is kept on a cardboard placed on a tumbler. When the cardboard is given
an impulse if flies off but the coin falls into the tumbler.
d) When a bullet is fired on to a glass plane a fine hole is formed.
1) a,b & c are true 2) a,b are true 3)a,b & d are true 4) a,c & d are true
Matrix Match Type:
18. Column - I Column - II
a) Rocket motion 1) Normal reaction force
b) Inertia 2) Force of friction
c) Magnitude of force 3) Newton’s first law
d) Contact forces 4) Newton’s second law
5) Newton’s third law
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 51
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
19. S I: If two objects of different masses have same momentum, the lighter body
posses greater velocity.
S II: For all bodies momentum always remains same if force applied is same. For
a given time
1) Both I & II True 2) Both I & II False
3) Statement I is True & Statement II is False
4) Statement I is False & Statement II is True
Multi Correct Choice Type:
20. Choose the correct statements:
1) Both action and reaction are forces
2) Action and rection act simultaneously but act on differnt bodies
3) Action and reaction cannot cancel each other
4) Action and reaction forces occurs in pairs only
21. Choose the correct statements:
1) 1kg-wt = 9.8 kg m /s2 2) 1g-wt = 980 g m /s2
3) 1kg-wt = 980 g cm /s2 4) 1g-wt = 980 dyne
Comprehension Type:
Inertia of a body may be defined as the tendency of a body to oppose any change in
its state of rest or uniform motion.
22. Two bodies ‘A’ and ‘B’ of same masses are moving with velocities V and 2V
respectively. Then the ratio of their inertia is
1) 1 : 1 2) 2 : 1 3) 3 : 1 4) 4 : 1
23. Which of the following has the largest inertia ?
1) A pin 2) A pen
3) Your physics book 4) Your loaded school bags
24. An athlete runs some distance before taking a long jump, because
1) It helps him to gain energy 2) It helps to apply large force
3) It gives himself large amount of inertia 4) None of these
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 52
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
SYNOPSIS-2
Law of conservation of momentum :
According to this law, the total momentum of a system remains constant if no
net external force acts on the system.
That is, momentum of a system. p = constant, if net external force acting on it is
zero (i.e. Fexternal = 0).
Conservation of momentum from third law of motion :
If a number of bodies collide with one another the total momentum of the bodies
just before collision is equal to the total momentum just after collision.
Example : Let a moving ball collides with another stationary ball lying on a ground.
Observe, what happens after collision? The moving ball will slow down i.e., its
velocity decreases after colliding with the stationary ball. On the other hand, the
stationary ball begins to move i.e. its velocity increases after collision. We know,
momentum of a body = mass of the body × velocity of the body (i.e. P mv ). Therefore,
the momentum of moving ball decreases after collision and the momentum of the
stationary ball increases after collision. Thus, we find that when two balls collide
with each other, then moving ball loses momentum and the stationary ball gains
momentum. The loss of momentum of one ball is equal to the gain of momentum
of other ball. However, the total momentum of these colliding balls before and
after the collision remains the same. This is the law of conservation of momentum.
Derivation :
Let us consider two marbles A and B having masses m 1 and m2 moving with
initial velocities, u1 and u2 (u1 > u2) in the same direction.
m1 m2 m1 m2
u1 u2
A B A B
Before collision At the collision
m1 v1 v2
m2
A B
After collision
After collision the two bodies move with velocities v1 and v2 in the same direction
say as shown in figure.
Momentum of body A before collision = m1u1
Momentum of body B before collision = m2u2
Total momentum of body A and B before collision = m1 u1 + m2 u2
Similarly :
momentum of body A after collision = m1v1
momentum of body B after collision = m2v2
Total momentum of body A and B after collision = m1 v1 + m2 v2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 53
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
Suppose the two marbles collide with each other for ‘t’ seconds.
The momentum of marble A before and after collision is m1u1 and m1v1 respectively.
Change of momentum of body A during the collision = m1v1 - m1u1
The rate of change of momentum during the collision of body A will be
change of momentum m1v1 m1u1 m1 v1 u1
=
Time taken t t
Similarly, the rate of change of momentum of marble B will be
m2 v 2 m2 u2 m2 v 2 u2
t t
If the force exerted by marble A on B is F1 and that by B on A is F2, then according
to Newton’s 2nd law of motion,
m1 v1 u1 m v u2
F1 __________ (1) F2 2 2 __________ (2)
t t
According to Newton’s 3rd law of motion, the force exerted by marble A on B and
marble B on marble A are equal and opposite to each other.
F1 F2
m1 v1 u1 m2 v2 u2
m1v1 – m1u1 = –m2v2 + m2u2
t t
m1v1 + m2v2 = m1u1 + m2u2 or, m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
i,e. total momentum before collision = total momentum after collision.
Note : If the two bodies stick together after collision, then they move with common
m1u1 m2u2
velocity v (say) then m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v + m2v v
m1 m2
Examples to illustrate the law of conservation of momentum :
1. Recoil of a gun : We have already explained the recoil of a gun with the help of
Newton’s third law of motion. However, the recoil of a gun can also be explained
with the help of the law of conservation of momentum.
The bullet inside the gun and the gun itself forms a system. Thus, the system is
(gun + bullet). Before firing, the gun and the bullet are at rest, therefore,
momentum of the system before firing is zero.
When the bullet is fired, it leaves the gun in the forward direction with certain
momentum. Since no external force acts on the system, so the momentum of the
system (gun + bullet) must be zero after firing. This is possible only if the gun
moves backward with a momentum equal to the momentum of the bullet. That is
why gun recoils or moves backward.
M m v
v
BULLET
GUN
T
Gun and bullet
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 54
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
The velocity with which the gun moves backward after firing a bullet is known as
recoil velocity.
Calculation of Recoil Velocity of a gun :
Let, mass of the bullet = m;
velocity of the bullet after firing = v ; mass of the gun = M
Recoil velocity of the gun after firing = V
Since the system is at rest before firing. So momentum of the system (gun +
bullet) before firing = 0
Total momentum of the system (gun + bullet) after firing
= momentum of gun + momentum of bullet = M V + m v
According to the law of conservation of momentum,
m
M V + m v = 0 M V = – m v or V = v
M
Negative sign shows that the direction of the velocity of the gun after firing is
opposite to the direction of the velocity of the bullet.
Action and reaction being equal and opposite and acting simultaneously for same
duration, have equal and opposite impulses. They produce equal and opposite
changes of momentum in the pair of bodies involved. It keeps the total momentum
of the two body system constant (conserved)
Impulsive Force : A large force which acts for a small interval of time is called impulsive
force.
Impulse : Impulse of a force is defined as the change in momentum produced by the
given force and it is equal to the product of force and the time for which it acts.
According to Newton’s 2nd law of motion
v u mv mu Ft mv mu
F = ma = m
t t
Impulsive force = change in momentum.
For constant force, J = F×t,
The area bounded by the force-time graph measures Impulse.
Note : Impulse is a vector quantity, whose direction is same as that of force.
Unit : S. I. unit of impulse = N s or kg m/s
C.G.S unit of impulse = dyne second or g cm/s.
Application of Impulse :
a) shock absorbers are used in vehicles to reduce the magnitude of impulsive
force.
b) A cricketer lowers his hands, while catching the ball to reduce the impulsive
force.
Elastic & Inelastic Collisions : During collisions, there will be an exchange of
momentum between the bodies. However the kinetic energy of the bodies may
remain constant or change. Accordingly, the collisions are classified into two kinds.
They are
1) Elastic Collisions and 2) Inelastic collisions.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 55
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
Elastic Collisions : The collisions in which both mometum and kinetic energy are
conserved are known as elastic collisions. The collision between nuclei and
fundamental particles are elastic collisions.
Inelastic Collisions : The collisions in which kinetic energy is not conserved but law
of conservation of momentum holds good are are known as ineleastic collisions.
When two bodies stick together after collision, the collision is said to be completly
inelastic. The collision bewteen a bullet and its target when the bullet remains
embedded in the target is an example of perfectly inelastic collision. During
these collisions the loss of kinetic energy appears in the form of heat or as
excitation energy as in the case of atomic collisions.
ACTIVITY :-
Take a big rubber balloon and inflate it fully. Tie its neck using a thread. Also
using adhesive tape, fix a straw on the surface of this balloon.
Pass a thread through the straw and hold one end of the thread in your hand or
fix it on the wall.
Ask your friend to hold the other end of the thread or fix it on a wall at some
distance.
Now remove the thread tied on the neck of balloon. Let the air escape from the
mouth of the balloon.
Observe the direction in which the straw moves.
WORK SHEET-2
1. Mutual forces between two bodies are always
1) Unequal and opposite 2) Equal and opposite
3) Equal and in the same direction 4) Unequal
2. The recoil of a gun can be explained with the help of the
1) Newton’s First Law 2) Newton’s Second Law
3) Newton’s Third Law 4) None of these
3. According to Newton’s Second Law of motion impulsive force is equal to
1) mv 2) mu 3) mv mu 4) mv mu
4. The momentum of moving ball ___________ after collision
1) Zero 2) Decreases 3) Increases 4) None
5. The momentum of the stationary ball ___________ after collision.
1) Zero 2) Decreases 3) Increases 4) None
6. When a body is travelling at constant velocity, the net force on it is ___
1) < 1 2) > 1 3) 0 4)
7. The momentum and energy are conserved in this collision.
1) Inelastic 2) Elastic
3) Perfectly elastic 4) In any collision
8. The momentum only conserved but not energy in this collision
1) Inelastic 2) Elastic
3) Perfectly inelastic 4) In any collision
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 56
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
9. After collision they stick together in this collision
1) Perfectly inelastic 2) Perfectly elastic
3) Elastic 4) Inelastic
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. The momentum of the system is conserved
1) Always 2) Never
3) Only in absence of external force 4) Only when an external force acts
2. Conservation of linear momentum is a direct consequence of
1) Newton’s first law of motion 2) Newton’s second law of motion
3) Newton’s third law of motion 4) None of these
3. When two bodies of masses m1 and m2 moving with velocities u1 and u2 in the
same direction collide with each other and v 1 and v2 are their velocities after
collision in the same direction, then
1) m1v1 + m2v2 = m2u2 – m1u1 2) m1v1 + m2v2 = m1u1 – m2u2
3) m2u2 + m2u1 = m2v1 + m1v2 4) m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
4. Which of the following is not a vector quantity?
1) mass 2) Impulse 3) Momentum 4) Force
5. Choose the correct answer
1). S.I Unit of impluse is N-S 2) C.G.S Unit of Impluse in N-S
3). Impluse is a scalar quantity 4) Impluse has no direction
6. A bullet of mass 100g is fired from a gun of mass 20 kg with a velocity of 100ms –1.
Then the velocity of recoil of the gun is
1) –1.5 m/s 2) –0.5 m/s 3) –2.5 m/s 4) 3.5 m/s
7. Statement I: Collision between two particles is not necessarily associated with
physical contact betwen them.
Statement II: Only in physical contact momentum transfer takes place.
1) Both I & II True 2) Both I & II False
3) Statement I is True & Statement II is False
4) Statement I is False & Statement II is True
8. The car A of mass 1500 kg travelling at 25 m/s collides with another car B of
mass 1000 kg travelling at 15 m/s in the same direction. After collision the
velocity of car A becomes 20 m/s. The velocity of car B after the collision is
1) 12.2 m/s 2) 11.5 m/s 3) 22.5 m/s 4) 5.22 m/s
9. A body of mass 2Kg moving with uniform velocity of 40ms 1 collides with another
body at rest. If the two bodies move together with a velocity of 25ms 1 , mass of
the other body is
1) 0.6 Kg 2) 0.9 Kg 3) 1.2 Kg 4) 1.5Kg
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 57
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
10. A body of mass 6Kg travelling with a velocity of 10ms 1 collides elastically with a
body of mass 4Kg travelling at a speed of 5ms 1 in opposite direction and comes
to rest. Then velocity of the second body is
1) 0 2) 6ms 1 3) 8ms 1 4) 10ms 1
11. A truck weighing 2500 kg and moving with a velocity 28 ms –1 collides with a
stationary car weighing 300 kg. The truck and the car move together after the
impact. Then their common velocity is impact. Then their common velocity is
1) 25 m/s 2) 20 m/s 3) 15 m/s 4) 10 m/s
12. A body of mass 20Kg moving with a velocity of 20ms 1 collides with another body
of mass 40Kg moving in the same direction with a velocity of 10ms 1 . After
collision, if they move together, their common velocity is
10 20 40 50
1) ms 1 2) ms 1 3) ms 1 4) ms 1
3 3 3 3
13. When two bodies of masses m 1 and m 2 moving with velocities u 1 and u 2
inthe opposite direction collide with each other and move together after
collision in the same direction with a common velocity v, then
m1u1 m2u2
1) v 2) m2u1 – m1u2 = (m1 + m2)v
m1 m2
3) m1u1 – m2u2 = (m1 – m2)v 4) m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v – m2v
14. A sphere of mass 25Kg moving with a velocity of 40ms 1 collides with another
sphere of mass 15Kg which is at rest. After collision if they move with the same
velocity, that velocity is equal to
1) 25ms 1 2) 40ms 1 3) 15ms 1 4) 12ms 1
15. Two spheres of masses 2Kg and 3Kg travelling in opposite direction with velocities
8ms 1 and 6ms 1 collide. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, then final velocity
is
1) 0.1m/s 2) 0.2m/s 3) 0.3m/s 4) 0.4m/s
Reasoning Type:
16. Statement I : A large force which acts for a small interval of time is called impulsive
force.
Statement II : The total momentum of a system remains constant if no net external
force acts on the system.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement
I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement
I. 3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 58
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
17. A neutron of mass 1.67 1027 Kg moving with a speed of 3 106 ms 1 collides
with a deutron of mass 3.34 1027 Kg at rest. After collision they both stick
together and form a trition. Velocity of triton is
1) 1 0 8 m s 1 2) 1 0 1 0 m s 1
3) 1 0 6 m s 1 4) 1 0 4 m s 1
Matrix Match Type:
18. Column - I Column - II
a) Impulse 1) Dimensional formula is [MLT-1]
b) Momentum 2) Area of force time graph
c) Body is at rest 3) Quantity of motion
d) Force 4) Linear momentum is zero
5) Rate of change of momentum
19. Statement I : kg m/s is the unit of impulse.
Statement II: kg m/s is the unit of mass.
1) Both I & II True 2) Both I & II False
3) Statement I is True & Statement II is False
4) Statement I is False & Statement II is True
Multi Correct Choice Type:
20. A truck of mass 500 kg moving at 4 m/s collides with another truck of mass 1500
kg moving in the same direction at 2 m/s. What is their common velocity just
after the collision if they move together ?
1) 2 m/s 2) 2.5 m/s 3) 3 m/s 4) 3.5 m/s
21. A man and a cart approach each other. Mass of the main is 64Kg and his velocity
is 5.Kmph. Mass of the cart is 32kg and its velocity is 1.8Kmph. If the main jumps
into the cart, the velocity of the cart becomes
1) 3Kmph 2) 4.11 Kmph 3) 1.8 Kmph 4) 5.4 Kmph
22. Two masses m A and mB moving with velocities VA and VB in opposite directions
collide elastically. After that the masses m A & mB moving with velocities VB & VA
respectively. The ratio m A & mB is
m A / mB VA VB
1) 1 2) VA / VB 3) 4)
mA VA VB
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 59
CLASS IX-PHYSICS NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION
KEY & SOLUTIONS
NEWTON’S LAWS OF MOTION_
WORK SHEET-1
CUQ: 1) 1 2) 3 3) 3 4) 2 5) 2 6) 4 7) 1 8) 3
9) 2 10) 3 11) 1
JEE MAINS : 7) 3 8) 3 9) 2 10) 4 11) 3 12) 1 13) 1,2,3,4
14) 1 15) 2,4 16) 1,2,3,4 17) 1,2,3 18) a-5,b-3,c-4, d-1,2
19) 1 20) 1,2,3,4 21) 1,3,4 22) 1 23) 4 24) 3
WORK SHEET-2
CUQ: 1. 2 2. 3 3. 3 4. 2 5. 3
6. 3 7. 2 8. 1 9. 1
JEE MAINS :
1. 4 2. 3 3. 4 4. 1 5. 1 6. 2
7. 4 8. 3 9. 3 10. 4 11. 1 12. 3
13. 1 14.2 15. 1 16. 1 17. 3
18. a-1,2; b-1,3; c-4; d-5 19. 3 20. 2 21. 2 22. 1
HINTS & SOLUTIONS
6. m1v1 m2 v2 m1 100g 0.1kg , m2 20kg
v1 100m /s ; 0.1 100 20v2 ; v2 0.5m /s
8. mA 1500kg mB 1000kg
u1 25m /s u2 15m /s
v1 20m /s v2 ?
According to conservation of momentum
m1u1 m2u2 m1v1 m2v 2
1500 x 25 + 1000 x 15 = 1500 x 20 + 1000 x v2
v2 =22.5m/s
9. m1u1 m2u2 m1 m2 v ; 10. m1u1 m2u2 m1v1 m2v 2
11. m1u1 m2u2 m1 m2 v
************
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 60
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
CONTENTS
Conservation of linear momentum
Impulse
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 61
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
KNOW YOUR SCIENTIST
Galileo Galilei (1564 - 1642)
Galileo Galilei was a key figure in the scientific revolution
in Europe about four centuries ago. Galileo proposed the
concept of acceleration. From experiments on motion of
bodies on inclined planes or falling, freely, he contradicted
the Aristotelian notion that a force was required to keep a
body in motion and that heavier bodies fall faster than lighter
bodies under gravity. He thus arrived at the law of inertia
that was the starting point of the subsequent epochal work
Galileo Galilei of Isaac Newton. Newton brought out another masterpiece
(1564 - 1642) optics that summarized his work on light and colour.
CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
SYNOPSIS-1
Linear momentum
1. The product of mass and the velocity of a particle is defined as its linear
momentum
P . So, P mv
The magnitude of linear momentum may be written as P = mv
S.I. unit of momentum is kgm/s
C.G.S unit of momentum is gcm/s
Relation between momentum and kinetic energy
P2
Thus, P 2Km or K
2m
Here, K is the kinetic energy of the particle. In accordance with Newton’s second
law,
dv d mv dP dP
F ma m Thus, F
dt dt dt dt
In case the external force applied to a particle (or a body) be zero, we have
dP
F 0 or P = constant
dt
Showing that in the absence of an external force, the linear momentum of a
particle (or the body) remains constant. This is called the law of conservation of
linear momentum. The law may be extended to a system of particles or to the
centre of mass of a system of particles. For example, for a system of particles it
takes the form.
If net force (or the vector sum of all the forces) on a system of particles is zero, the
vector sum of linear momentum of all the particles remain conserved, or
If F F1 F2 F3 . . . . . . . . Fn 0 Then, P1 P2 P3 . . . . . . . . Pn constant
The same is the case for the centre of mass of a system of particles, i.e., if
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 62
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
F COM 0, P COM constant .
Thus, the law of conservation of linear momentum can be applied to a single
particle, to a system of particles or even to the centre of mass of the particles.
The law of conservation of linear momentum enables us to solve a number of
problems which can not be solved by a straight application of the relation F ma .
i. When no external force acts upon a system, then the vector sum of momenta of
all bodies of that system remains constant.
For any collison conservation of momentum holds good.
dP
F and when F 0,P is constant
dt
ii. Mathematical treatment of Newton’s third law gives law of conservation of
linear momentum.
iii. Examples for applications of law of conservation of linear momentum are (a)
collisions (b) recoil of gun when bullet is fired (c) explosion of bomb shell.
iv. If a bullet of mass m is fired from a gun of mass M with velocity u, recoil
mu
velocity of the gun is V
M
Here total momentum of the system before and after firing is zero.
Here relative velocity of bullet with respect to gun is urel u v
u M
Here
v m
Kg m
If K R and K b are the kinetic energies of gun and bullet,
Kb M
When a bullet is fired from a gun, both bullet and gun will have the same
momentum in magnitude.
v. If a stationary bomb shell explodes into a number of fragments, the vector
sum of the momenta of all fragments adds up to zero.
m V n n 0
If a stationary shell explodes into two fragments of masses m1 and m2 , they
move in opposite directions so that total momentum is zero.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 63
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
m1V1 m2 V2 0
m1V1 m2V2 (- ve sign indicates the opposite direction of motion)
vi. A stationary shell of mass M exploded into two fragments. A fragment of
mass m flies off with velocity u. Then the other fragment flies off with velocity
V given by the following relation
M 0 mu M m V
mu
V
M m
(Negative sign indicates that the two fragments fly off in opposite directions)
vii. A shell of mass M moving with velocity V explodes into two fragments with
the masses m1 and m2 which fly off with velocities V and V2 . Then from
1
conservation of momentum,
m 1 V 1 m 2 V 2
2 2
V
m 1 m 2
where M m1 m2
If the shell explodes into a number of fragments which move with different
velocities,
M V m1 V1 m2 V2 ........ m n Vn
here M m1 m2 ........ mn
viii. Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are moving with velocities V and V2 .
1
They collide and after collision they merge and the compound mass moved
with a velocity V .
m1V1 m2V2
2 2
If V and V2 are perpendicular to each other, then V
1 m1 m2
ix. In uniform circular motion, momentum is not conserved but K.E is conserved.
x. When a stationary bomb shell explodes final K.E is greater than the initial K.E.
xi. When a body is projected vertically up from the ground, momentum of the body
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 64
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
earth system is conserved.
WORKSHEET-1
1. Momentum is which quantity?
1) Scalar 2) Vector 3) Tensor 4) All of these
2. The formulae for linear momentum is, P =
m
1) mV 2) 3) m V 4) m V
V
3. Units of momentum is
1) kg ms 2) kg m/s 3) kg m s2 4) kgm/s2
4. Dimensional formula of momentum is
1) [MLT–2] 2) [ML2T–2] 3) [M2LT] 4) [MLT–1]
5. The relation between linear momentum (P) and kinetic energy(K.E) is
P2 P2 P2 P2
1) 2) 3) 4)
m 2m 3m 4m
6. If the external force applied to a particle(or a body) be zero, then momentum (P)
is
1) Zero 2) constant 3) variable 4) All of these
7. The change in momentum per unit time of a body represents
1) impulse 2) force 3) kinetic energy 4) resultant force
8. The momentum of the system is conserved
1) always 2) never
3) only in absence of external force 4)only when an external force acts
9. Law of conservation of linear momentum is
1) I law 2) II law 3) III law 4) None of these
10. A shell explodes and many pieces fly off in different directions. Which of the
following is conserved?
1) kinetic energy 2) momentum
3) neither momentum nor KE 4)momentum and KE
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 65
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A cricket ball of mass 100g is moving with velocity 25m/s. Then the momentum
of the ball is
1) 7.5kg m/s 2)19.5kg m/s 3)2.5kg m/s 4) 27.5kg m/s
2. A bullet of mass 20 g is horizontally fired with a velocity 150 ms–1 from a pistol of
mass 2 kg. What is the recoil velocity of the pistol?
1) 1 ms–1 2) –1.5 ms–1 3) 2 ms–1 4) –3.5 ms–1
–1
3. A bullet of mass 5 g is fired at a velocity 900 ms from a rifle of mass 2.5 kg. What
is the recoil velocity of the rifle ?
1) -1.8 m/s 2) 1.8 m/s 3) 2.8 m/s 4) 3.8 m/s
4. A shell of mass 40 kg moving with a velocity of 80 ms–1 explodes and bursts into
two fragments of masses 32 Kg and 8Kg. If the latter comes to rest, velocity of the
former is
1) 10 ms–1 2) 0.1 ms–1 3) 1000 ms–1 4) 100 ms–1
5. A bullet of mass a and velocity b is fired into a large block of mass c. The final
velocity of the system is
cb ab a b a a cb
1) 2) 3) 4)
a b a c c a
6. One projectile moving with velocity v in space, gets burst into 2 parts of masses in
the ratio 1 : 3. The smaller part becomes stationary. What is the velocity of the
other part?
2v 4v 5v
1) 2) 3) 4) 3v
3 3 3
7. A particle of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity v strikes a stationary particle of mass ‘2m’
and sticks to it, the speed of system will be
1) v/3 2) 2v 3) v/2 4) 3
8. A space craft of mass 2000 kg moving with a velocity of 600m/s suddenly explodes
into two pieces. One piece of mass 500 kg is left stationary. The velocity of the
other part must be
1) 600 m/s 2) 800 m/s 3) 1500 m/s 4) 1000 m/s
Statement Type:
9. Statement I : In uniform circular motion, momentum is not conserved but kinetic
energy is conserved
Statement II : When a stationary bomb shell explodes final kinetic energy is
greater than the initial kinetic energy.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement I.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 66
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
Integer Type:
10. A 50 kg man standing on the surface of negligible friction kicks forward a 0.1 kg
stone so that it acquires a speed of 10 ms–1. Then the velocity acquired by the
man is ______ cm/s
11. A man and a cart move towards each other. The man weighs 64 kg and the
cart 32kg. The velocity of the man is 5.4 km/hr and that of the cart is 1.8 km/
hr.When the man approaches the cart, he jumps on to it. The velocity of the cart
carrying the man will be
1) 3 km/hr 2) 30 km/hr 3) 1.8 km/ hr 4) zero
12. A man and a cart move towards each other. The man weighs 64 kg and the cart
36kg. The velocity of the man is 2 km/hr and that of the cart is 1 km/hr. When
the man approaches the cart, he jumps on to it. The velocity of the cart
carrying the man will be
1) 3 km/hr 2) 0.92 km/hr 3) 1.8 km/ hr 4) zero
13. The hero of a stunt film fires 50 g bullets from a machine gun, each at a speed of
1.0 km/s. If he fires 20 bullets in 4 seconds, what average force does he exert
against the machine gun during this period ?
1) 150N 2) 250N 3) 350 N 4) 450N
14. A railway truck of mass 104 Kg travelling at 1 ms1 collides with another of
double its mass moving in the opposite direction with velocity of 0.2 ms1 . If
the trucks couple automatically on collision, their common velocity in ms1 .
1) 0.2 2) 0.4 3) 0.6 4) 0.1
15. When U-238 nucleus originally at rest decays by emitting an particle with a
speed of V ms1 , the recoil speed of the residual nucleus is in ms
1
V 4V 4V 4V
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 234 238 238
Multi correct answer Type:
16. A 15.0 kg explosive moving vertically upward at speed 10.0 m/s suddently explodes
into three fragments of masses 2.0 kg, 3.0kg and 10.0 kg. Immediately after the
explosion, the 2.0 kg mass is moving upward at a speed of 20.0 m/s and the 3.0 kg
mass is discovered to be moving horizontally at a speed of 5.0 m/s. If v is the
velocity of 10 kg then
1) Momentum of the system after the explosion is 15 i 40 j 10 v
2) the velocity of the 10.0 kg piece is 1.5 i 11.0 j
3) Momentum of the system after the explosion is 1.5 i 11.0 j
4) the magnitude of speed of the 10.0 kg piece is 11.1m /s
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 67
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
17. A bomb of mass 6 kg initially at rest explodes in to three
identical fragments. One of the fragments moves with a velocity of 10 3 i m / s ,
another fragment moves with a velocity of 10 j m/s, then the third fragment
moves with a velocity of magnitude.
1) 30 m/s 2) 20 m/s 3) 15 m/s 4) 5 m/s
18. A man of mass m is standing on a platform of mass M kept on smooth ice. If the man
starts moving on the platform with a speed v relative to the platform, with what
velocity relative to the ice does the platform recoil ?
mv mv mv 2mv
1) 2) 3) 4)
Mm Mm M 2m Mm
STAR FACT
Why are engines fitted at the rear end in some vehicles?
Rear engines reduce fatigue of the driver. He is also free from noise and vibration
from the engine. Moreover, the weight on the front portion of the vehicle is reduced and so
the torque needed to steer the vehicle would be less. Also, the hot air from the engine does
not enter inside the cabin. However, the cost of manufacturing a rear engine vehicle is
higher compared to front engine vehicle.
SYNOPSIS-2
IMPULSE :
Consider a constant force F which acts for a time t on a body of mass m, thus,
changing its velocity from u to v . Because the force is constant, the body will
travel with constant acceleration a where
F ma and a t v u
F
hence, t v u or F t m v m u
m
The product of constant force F and the time t for which it acts is called the
impulse J of the force and this is equal to the change in linear momentum
which it produces. Thus,
Impulse momentum theorem:
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 68
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
Im pulse J F t P P f P i
Instantaneous Impulse : There are `many occasions when a force acts for such a
short time that the effect is instantaneous, e.g., a bat striking a ball. In such
causes, although the magnitude of the force and the time for which it acts may
each be unknown but the value of their product (i.e., impulse) can be known by
measuring the initial and final momenta. Thus, we can write
J F dt P P f P i
Regarding the impulse it is important to note that impulse applied to an object in
a given time interval can also be calculated from the area under force – time
F t graph in the same time interval.
LORENTZ (1853 - 1928)
Leiden University, Leiden, the Netherlands
“in recognition of the extraordinary services he
rendered by his research into the influence of
Lorentz magnetism upon radiation phenomena’’
(1853 - 1928)
WORKSHEET-2
1. A large force is acting on a body in short interval of time is called
1) Impulse 2) Momentum 3) Energy 4) Pressure
2. Impulse = _____×________.
1) Force, time 2) Acceleration, Force
3) Mass, acceleration 4) force, Velocity
3. Impulse, in the case of constant force (J) =
F t
1) Ft 2) 3) 4) F t
t F
4. Formula for instantaneous impulse(Incase of variable force)
dF F
1) J F dt 2) J F dt 3) J 4) J
dt t
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 69
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
5. Impulse is a ______quantity.
1) Vector 2) Scalar 3) Tensor 4) All of these
6. Units of impulse is
1) Ns 2) Kg ms 3) kg m–1s 4) Ns–1
7. Impulse is equal to
1) momentum 2) change in momentum
3) rate of change of momentum 4) rate of change of force
8. Area under force-time graph and time axis gives
1) Linear momentum 2) Displacement 3) Work done 4) Impulse
9. A crickter drags his hands backward to catch the ball, because
1) by increasing the time in which he stops the ball, reduces force on his hands
2) by increasing distance, he allows ball to travel a greater distance for more runs
3) it is an art to catch the ball 4) it is rule in cricket
10. Shock abosorbers are used in vehicles because
1) It reduces the impulse force by increased by impulsive time
2) It increases the impulsive force by reducing impulsive time
3) It reduces the impulsive force by reducing impulsive time
4) It increases the impulsive force by increasing impulsive time
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A force of 50 N acts on a body for 10 s. What will be the change in momentum?
1) 200 Ns 2) 400 Ns 3) 500 Ns 4) 1000 Ns
2. A force of 100N acts on a body in 10s, what will be the change in momentum?
1) 200Ns 2) 400Ns 3) 500Ns 4) 1000Ns
3. A train of mass m is moving with velocity v1 , It is given an impulse such that the
velocity becomes v 2 . Then magnitude of impulse is equal to
1) m v 2 v1
2) m v1 v 2
3) m v 2 v1
4) 0.5m v 2 v1
4. A 1 kg ball drops vertically onto the floor with a speed of 25 m/s and rebounds
with a speed of 10 m/s. What is the impulse acting on the ball in
1) 35N-s 2) 40 N-s 3) 56 N-s 4) 70 N-s
–1
5. A cricket ball of mass 500 g is moving with speed of 36 km h . It is reflected back
with the same speed. What is the impulse applied on it ?
1) 10 kg m s–1 2) 20 kg m s–1 3) 30 kg m s–1 4) 40 kg m s–1
6. A 2kg ball drops vertically on to the floor with a speed of 25m/s and rebounds
wilth the speed of 10m/s. What is the impulse acting on the ball is
1) 35Ns 2) 40Ns 3) 56Ns 4) 70Ns
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 70
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
7. A cricket ball of mass 1000g moving with the speed of 18kmph it is reflected
back with the same speed.Then impulse applied on it is
1) 10 kgm/s 2) 20Ns 3) 30 Ns 4) 40 Ns
8. When a ball of mass 5 kg hits a bat with a velocity 3 m/s, in positive d i r e c ti o n
and it moves back with a velocity = 4 m/s, find the impulse in SI units.
1) 25 N-s 2) 35 N-s 3) 45 N-s 4) 55 N-s
Matrix Match Type
9. Column-I Column-II
a) the change in momentum is equal to 1) Impulse
b) the product of the force and time interval
which the force acts is equal to 2) dyne second
c) unit of impulse 3) kg m s–1
d) dimensional formula of impulse is 4) MLT–1
5) ML–1T
Multi Correct Choice Type:
10. A force of 16 N acts on a ball of mass 80g for one micro-second. Then
1) the acceleration is 200 ms–2 2) the impulse is 16 × 10–6 N s
3) the acceleration is 100 ms–2 4) the impulse is 12 × 10–6 N s
11. Calculate the impulse necessary to stop a 1500kg car travelling at 90km h–1.
1) –375 N s 2) –3700 N s 3) –3500 N s 4)–37500 N s
12. Calculate the impulse necessary to stop the car of mass 1000kg travelling at
72kmph.
1) 10000 Ns 2) 20000 Ns 3) 30000 Ns 4) 40000 Ns
Integer Answer Type:
13. The thrust (F) versus time graph of a rocket is shown in figure.
F(kN)
20
t(s)
2 10 16
The mass of the rocket is 1200 kg. The velocity of rocket, 16 seconds after starting
from rest is _________ m/s. Neglect gravity.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 71
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
14. A force time graph for the motion of a body is as shown in figure. Change in linear
momentum between 0 and 6s is
1
F(N)
0
2 6
4 t(s)
-2
1. zero 2. 8 Ns 3. 4 Ns 4. 2 Ns
15. An impulse 15N-s given to a body changes its velocity from 15m/s to 25m/s. The
increase in the kinetic energy of the body is given by
1)100J 2) 200J 3) 300J 4) 50J
16. An impulse 5N-s given to a body changes its velocity from 4m/s to 6m/s. The
increase in the kinetic energy of the body is given by
1)50J 2) 10J 3) 25J 4) 5J
17. A body of mass 3 kg moves with initial velocity u i 4j m/s and it’s final velocity
v 2i 3j m/s then
1) Impulse is equal to 3( i j)Ns 2) Magnitude of impulse is 3 2 Ns
3) Impulse is equal to 2( i j)Ns 4) Magnitude of impulse is 2 2 Ns
18. A truck of mass 2 × 103 kg travelling at 4 m/s is brought to rest
in 2 s when it strikes a wall. What force ( assume constant ) is exerted by the
wall ?
1) 2×103N 2) 4×103N 3) 5×103N 4) 6×103N
19. A bullet of mass 10 –3 kg strikes an obstacle and moves at 60° to its original
direction. If its speed also changes from 20 m/s to 10 m/s. Find the magnitude
of impulse acting on the bullet.
1) 3 102 N s 2) 3 103 N s 3) 3 102 N s 4) 30 102 N s
20. A particle of mass 2 kg is initially at rest. A force starts acting on it in one direction
whose magnitude changes with time. The force time graph is shown in figure.
F(N)
20
10
2 4 6 t(s)
O 10
Then the velocity of the particle at the end of 10 s is ___ 10m / s .
**********
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 72
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
WORK SHEET-1_KEY
CUQ:1) 2 2) 1 3) 2 4) 4 5) 2 6) 2 7) 4 8) 3
9) 3 10) 2
JEE MAINS AND ADVANCED:
1) 3 2) 2 3) 1 4) 4 5) 2 6) 2 7) 1 8) 2
9) 2 10) 2 11) 1 12) 2 13) 2 14) 1 15) 2
16) 1,3,4 17) 2 18) 1
HINTS & SOLUTIONS
2. Apply conservation of momentum
3. Here the system is bullet + rifle. Total initial momentum of the system = 0. Let v 1
and v 2 be the final velocities of the bullet and rifle respectively. Total final
momentum of the system = m 1 v 1 + m 2 v 2 . Therefore from the principle of
m1
conservation of linear momentum, m1v1 + m2v2 = 0 v2 v1
m2
5 10 3 900
v2 1.8 m/s
2.5
The negative sign indeicats that they are moving in opposite direction.
4. using conservation of momentum
40× 80 = 32V + 8 × 0 40× 80 = 32V V = 100 m/s
6. Initial momentum of the system = mv. Let v| be the velocity of bigger part after burst.
3 | m 3 |
Final momentum of the system = m v 0 mv
4 4 4
3 | 4v
According to law of conservation of momentum mv m v v|
4 3
8. M (0) m1v1 m2v2
12. m1u1 m2u2 m1 m2 v
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 73
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
13. The momentum of each bullet = (0.050 kg) (1000 m/s) = 50 kg–m/s.
The gun is imparted this much of momentum by each bullet fired.
50 kg m/s 20
Thus, the rate of change of momentum of the gun 250 N
4s
14. From conservation of momentum
104 1 2 104 0.2 104 2 104 V
0.6 104
V 0.2ms1
3 10 4
15. From conservation of momentum
4V
238 0 234 V1 4V V1
234
17.
P3 P1 P2
18. Consider the situation shown in figure . Suppose the man moves at a speed w
towards right and the platform recoils at a speed V towards left, both relative to the
ice. Hence, the speed of the man relative to the platform is V + w. By the question,
V w v , or w v V - - - - - - - (1)
Taking the platform and the man to be the system, there is no external horizontal
force on the system. The linear momentum of the system remains constant.
Initially, both the man and the platform were at rest. Thus, 0 MV mw
mv
or, MV m v V [ Using (1)] or, V
Mm
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 74
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
WORKSHEET-2 KEY
CUQ:1) 1 2) 1 3) 1 4) 1 5) 1 6) 1 7) 2 8) 4
9) 1 10) 1
JEE MAINS AND ADVANCED:
1) 3 2) 4 3) 1 4) 1 5) 1 6) 4 7) 1 8) 2
9) a-1,b-1,c-2,3;d-4 10) 1,2 11) 4 12) 2 13) 200 14) 1
15) 3 16) 3 17)1,2 18)2 19) 3 20)5
HINTS & SOLUTIONS
2. I = F × t = 100 × 10 = 1000Ns
3. Sol : Impulse = Change in momentum = mv 2 mv1
5. Sol : Impulse = Change in momentum = [0.5 × 10 – 0.5 × –10] kg m s–1
= 0.5 [10 + 10] kg ms–1 = 10 kg m s–1
6. I m(v u)
7. I = 2mu
8. Im pu lse = ch an ge in lin ear m om en t u m = Pf – Pi = mv – mu= – 5 × 4 – 5 × 3 = – 35 N-s
Magnitude of impulse in SI units = 35
9. Conceptual
11. Sol : Impulse = Change in momentum = Mv – Mu = M(v – u)
= 1500(0 – 25) Ns = –37500 N s [ 90 km h–1 = 25 m s–1]
18. Using impulse = change in linear momentum.
F u
+ve
We have F.t = mvf – mvi = m(vf – vi)
or F(2) = 2×10 3 [0 – ( – 4)] or 2F = 8 × 103 or F = 4 × 103 N
19. Mass of the bullet m = 10 –3 kg
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 75
CLASS IX-PHYSICS CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM
20m/s 10 cos 60°
J1
120° 60°
10m/s J2 10 sin 60°
Consider components parallel to J 1.
J1 103
10 cos 60 20 or J1 15 103 N s
Similarly, parallel to J 2, we have J2 103 10 sin 60 0 5 3 10 3 N s
The magnitude of resultant impulse is given by
2
J J12 J22 103 15
2
5 3 or J 3 102 N s
**********
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 76
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
COLLISIONS
CONTENTS
Introduction to Collisions
Introduction to Elastic Collision
Introduction to Inelastic Collision
Special cases of Head on Elastic
Collision
Special cases of Head on Inelastic
collision
Newton’s Law of Restitution
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 77
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
MEMO GRAPH
COLLISION
Elastic collision Inelastic collision Oblique collision
During collision between
The bodies comes No fraction of mechanical
two objects a pair of equal
to their original energy remains stored as
and opposite impulses
shape and size deformation potential
act at the moment of
after the collision energy in the bodies
impact
The linear momentum,
kinetic energy
remains conserved
before collision
Newton’s law Some part of the mechanical
of restitution energy of the system goes to
the deformation potential
The colliding bodies do not energy
return to their original shape
and size completely after
collision
Only linear momentum
remains conserved
Separation speed
e=
Approach speed
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 78
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
COLLISIONS_SYNOPSIS-1
Collisions
The strong interaction among bodies involving exchange of momentum in a short
interval of time is called collision.
During collision bodies may or may not come into physical contact.
In the collision of particle with nucleus, due to coulombic repulsive forces
particle is scattered away without any physical contact.
Based on the direction of motion of colliding bodies, collisions are classified into
(i) Head on or one dimensional collision
(ii) oblique collision
Head on (or) one dimensional collision
A B A B
u1 u2 v1 v2
Before Collision After Collision
It is the collision in which the velocities of the colliding bodies are confined to
same straight line before and after collision.
Oblique Collision:
It is the collision in which the velocities of the colliding bodies are not confined to
same straight line before and after collision.
Oblique collision may be two dimensional or three dimensional.
When a particle hits elastically and obliquely another stationary particle of same
mass, then they always move perpendicular to each other after collision.
Types of Collision:Based on conservation of kinetic energy collisions are classified
into
(i) Elastic Collision (ii) Inelastic collision
Elastic Collision:It is the collision in which both momentum and kinetic energy
are conserved. Forces involved during collision are conservative in nature
Ex.1. Collision between atomic particles.
2. Collision between two smooth billiard balls.
3. Collision of particle with nucleus.
Inelastic collision:It is the collision in which momentum is conserved but not kinetic
energy. Some or all the forces involved during collision are non conservative.
Ex: Collision between two vehicles.
Perfectly inelastic collision:
It is the collision in which the colliding bodies stick together and move as a single
body after collision.
In perfectly inelastic collision the momentum remains conserved but the loss of
kinetic energy is maximum.
Ex: A bullet is fired into a wooden block and remains embedded in it.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 79
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
Line of impact:The line passing through the common normal to the surfaces in
contact during impact is called line of impact. The force during collision acts along
this line on both bodies.
Ex 1: Two balls A and B are approaching each other such that their centres are
moving along line CD.
Line of impact and
A line of motion
B
C D
A
B
Elastic collision in one dimension:
When two particles of masses m1 and m2 moving along the line joining their centers with velocities u1
and u2 u1 u2 before collision. v1 and v2 are velocities after collision
m1 m2
u1 u2 v1 v2
m1 m2
During After collision
Before collision Collision
From conservation of linear momentum
m1 u1 - v1 = m 2 v 2 - u 2
From Law of conservation of K.E
1 1 1 1
m1u12 + m 2 u 22 = m1v12 + m 2 v22
2 2 2 2
u1 - u 2 = v2 - v1
i.e Relative velocity of approach before collision
= Relative velocity of separation after collision
Velocities after collision are
m -m 2m 2
v1 = 1 2 u1 + u2
m1 +m2 m1 +m2
2m1 m 2 -m1
v2 = u1 + u2
m1 +m 2 m1 +m 2
Special cases:
If colliding particles have equal masses
i.e m1 m2 m ; v1 =u 2 , v 2 =u1
If two bodies are of equal masses and the second body is at rest ie., m m m and u2 0 then
1 2
v1 =0 ; v 2 =u 1
A lighter particle collides with heavier particle which is at rest m1 m 2 , u 2 0
v 1 = -u 1 , v2 =0
A heavier body collides with lighter body at rest
m1 m 2 , u 2 0 ;
v1 = u 1 , v 2 =2u1
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 80
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
Applications:
A body of mass m1 moving with a velocity v1 collides elastically with a stationary mass m2
1 2 m -m
1) Velocity of first body after collision v1 = m +m u1
1 2
2) velocity of second body after collision
2m1
v2 u1
m1 m2
2
1 1 m m2 2
3) KE of first body after collision (or) KE retained by first body K .E1 m1v12 m1 1 u1
2 2 m1 m2
2 2
1 m m2 m1 m 2
K.E ret m1u12 1 KE i
2 m1 m 2 m1 m 2
4) fraction of KE retained by 1st body
2
K .Eret m1 m2
K .Ei m1 m2
5) K.E. of second body after collision (or) KE transferred to the second body
2
1 1 2m1 2
K .E2 m2 v 2 2 m2 u1
2 2 m1 m2
4m m 1
KE2 1 2
m u2
m m 2 2 1 1
1 2
4m m
1 2
KEtra K .Ei
m m 2
1 2
6) Fraction of KE transferred from 1st body to second body (or) Fraction of KE lost by 1st body is
KEtra 4m1m2
2
KEi m1 m2
7) Fraction of momentum retained by m1
P1 m1v1 m1 m2
Pi m1u1 m1 m2
8) Fraction of momentum transferred from 1st body to second body
P2 Pi P1 P m m2 2m2
1 1 1 1
Pi Pi Pi m1 m2 m1 m2
COLLISIONS WORKSHEET-1
1. In any collision, which of the following is conserved.
1) Linear momentum of the system 2) Kinetic energy of the system
3) Both 1 and 2 4) None of these
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 81
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
2. Which physical quantity remains constant in an elastic collision?
1) Linear momentum only
2) Kinetic energy only
3) Both Linear momentum and kinetic energy
4) force
3. The quantities remaining constant in a collision are
1) momentum, kinetic energy and temperature
2) momentum and kinetic energy but not temperature
3) momentum and temperature but not kinetic energy
4) momentum, but neither kinetic energy nor temperature.
4. If both the bodies come to their original shape and size after the collision is said
to be
1) elastic 2) inelastic 3) oblique 4) none of these
5. When two bodies of equal mass moving towards each other collide elastically with
same velocity in magnitude, after collision
1) they stop
2) one body stops and the other moves
3) they move away with the same velocity in magnitude
4) they move with a common velocity
6. A heavier body moving with certain velocity collides head on elastically a lighter
body at rest. Then which of the following is true?
1) The heavier body moves with the same velocity along the same direction
2) The lighter body moves with twice that of the initial velocity of the heavier body
3) Both 1 and 2 4) None of these
7. In inelastic collision of two bodies, which of the following do not change after the
collision?
1) total kinetic energy 2) total linear momentum
3) total angular momentum 4) none of these
8. In an elastic collision
1) the initial kinetic energy is equal to the final kinetic energy
2) the final kinetic energy is less than the initial kinetic energy.
3) the kinetic energy remains constant
4) the kinetic energy first increases then decreases.
9. A body of mass M1 collides elastically with another body of mass M 2 at rest. There
is maximum transfer of energy when:
1) M1 > M2 2) M1 < M2
3) M1 = M2 4) same for all values of M1 and M2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 82
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
10. Internal forces can change:
1) the linear momentum but not the kinetic energy.
2) the kinetic energy but not the linear momentum.
3) linear momentum as well as kinetic energy.
4) neither the linear momentum nor the kinetic energy.
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A smooth sphere of mass M moving with velocity u directly collides elastically with
another sphere of mass m at rest. After collision their final velocities are V and v
respectively. The value of v is_____________.
2M 2m
1) u 2) u
mM mM
M M
3) u 4) u
mM 2m M
2. A body of mass 4kg moves with a velocity of 10m/s collide elastically with a body
of mass 8kg is at rest, then the velocity of 8kg body is
1) 4 m/s 2) 6.67 m/s 3) 10 m/s 4) 12 m/s
3. A 6 kg mass travelling at 2.5 ms 1 collides head on with a stationary 4 kg mass.
After the collision the 6 kg mass travels in its original direction with a speed of
1 ms 1 . The final velocity of 4 kg mass is
1) 1 m/s 2) 2.25ms 1 3) 2 ms 1 4) 0 ms 1
4. A block of mass 1 kg moving with a speed of 4 ms 1 , collides with another block of
mass 2 kg which is at rest. The lighter block comes to rest after collision. The
speed of the heavy body after collision is
1) 2 ms 1 2) 1 m s 1
3) 1.5 ms 1 4) 0.5 ms 1
5. A ball of 4 kg mass and a speed of 3 ms 1 has a head on elastic collision with a 6
kg mass initially at rest. The speeds of both the bodies after collision are
respectively
1) 0.6 ms 1 , 2.4 ms 1 2) 0.6 ms 1 , 2.4 ms 1
3) 0.6 ms 1 , 2.4 ms 1 4) 0.6 ms 1 , 2.4 ms 1
6. A marble going at a speed of 2 ms 1 hits another marble of equal mass at rest. If
the collision is perfectly elastic. The velocity of the first after collision is
1) 4 2) 0 3) 2 4) 3
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 83
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
Matrix Match Type
7. A particle of mass m, kinetic en ergy K and momentum P collides head on
elastically with another particle of mass 2m at rest. Match the following (after
collision)
Column-I Column-II
4
a) momentum of first particle 1) P
3
8K
b) momentum of second particle 2)
9
P
c) kinetic energy of first particle 3)
3
K
d) kinetic energy of second particle 4)
9
5) 1.33 P
Multi correct answer type:
8. A block moving horizontally on a smooth surface with a speed of 20 m/s bursts
into two equal parts continuing in the same direction. If one of the parts moves at
30 m/s, then
1) The speed with which the second part move is 10m/s.
2) The speed with which the second part move is 5m/s.
3) The fractional change in the kinetic energy is 1/4
4) The fractional change in the kinetic energy is 1/2
9. Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 collide each other elastically with
velocities V1,V 2 respectively ( V1>V 2). Then final velocities becomes V11, V21 after
collision if m1>>m2 and V2 = 0, then final velocity of balls are
1) 2V2, V2 2) 3V2, 0 3) V2, 3V1 4) V1, 2V1
10. Two balls bearings of same masses collide each other with initial velocities V1,V2
and final velocitites V11, V21 respectively then V11, V21 values are
1) 0, 2V1 2) 2V2,0 3) 2V2, 3V1 4) V2, V1
11. Two balls of masses m1 and m2 (m2>>m1) collide with each other with initial
velocities V1, V2 ( 0) . Then the final velocities of balls are
1) 0, –V1 2) V1, –2V2 3) –V1, 0 4) V1, 3V2
12. A body of mass 10 kg moving with a velocity of 5 ms 1 hits a body of 1 gm at rest.
The velocity of the second body after collision assuming it to be perfectly elastic
is
1) 10 ms 1 2) 5 ms 1 3) 15 ms 1 4) 0.10 ms 1
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 84
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
13. A body of mass 5kg moving with a speed of 3ms-1 collides head on with a body of
mass 3kg moving in the opposite direction at a speed of 2ms-1. The first body stops
after the collision. The final velocity of the second body is
1) 3ms-1 2) 5ms-1 3) -9ms-1 4)30ms-1
14. Two masses mA and mB moving with velocities vA and vB in opposite directions collide
elastically. After that the masses mA and mB move with velocity vB and vA respectvely.
mA
Then the ratio m is _________________.
B
1) 1:1 2) 1:2 3) 2:1 4)1:3
COMPREHENSION TYPE :
Three particles of equal masses travelling with velocities of 10m/s, 20m/s and
30m/s , respectively, along x-axis , at an angle of 30 0 to the direction of positive
x-axis and y-axis (as shown in Fig.) collide simultaneously and get sticked to
each other
v
3 m
10m/s
X
m 300 0
30m/s
20m/s
m
15. The combined particle will move with velocity
10 10
1) 20 2 3 m / s 2) 20 2 3 m / s
3 3
10 10
3)
3
5 3 m / s 4)
3
5 3 m / s
16. Combined particle will move at angle with x-axis where
1) tan 2
1
3 1
2) tan 2
1
3 1
3) tan
1
32
4) tan 2
1
32
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 85
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
17. A particle of mass ‘m’ moving with a velocity 3iˆ 2 ˆj m / s
collides with stationary mass ‘M’ and finally ‘m’ moves with a velocity
m 1
2iˆ ˆj m / s if
M 13
the velocity of the M after collision is?
5iˆ ˆj 5iˆ ˆj
1) 5iˆ ˆj m / s
2) 5iˆ ˆj m / s 3) m/ s
13 13
4) m / s
13 13
Multi correct answer type:
18. A particle (A) of mass m1 elastically collides with another stationary particle (B)
of mass m2. then:
m1 1
1)
m2 2 and the particles fly a part in the opposite direction with equal velocities.
m1 1
2)
m2 3 and the particles fly apart in the opposite direction with equal velocities.
m1 2
3) o
m2 1 and the collision angle between the particles is 60 symmetrically.
m1 2
4) o
m2 1 and the particles fly apart symmetrically at an angle 90
COLLISIONS_SYNOPSIS-2
Head on inelastic collision:
Consider two bodies of masses m1 and m1 moving with initial velocities u1 and u2
u1 u2 after collision two bodies will move with velocities v1 and v2 .
Applying law of conservation of linear momentum
m1u1 m2u2 m1v1 m2 v2 (1)
v2 v1
By the def of coefficient of restitution e
u1 u2 ; v2 v1 e(u1 u2 ) (2)
Substituting v1 and v2 values from eq 2 in eq 1 we get
m em2 m2 m1 1 e u1 m2 em1
v1 1 u1 1 e u2 ; v2 u2
m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 m2
u1 u1 v1 1 e
If m1 m2 m u2 0 then v1 1 e ; v2 1 e
2 2 v2 1 e
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 86
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
Loss of KE of the system:
1 m1m2 2
u1 u2 1 e
2
K .E K .E1 K .E f
2 m1 m2
In case of perfectly in-elastic collision e 0
1 m1m2 2
loss in K.e of system is K .E 2 m m u1 u2
1 2
If two bodies are approaching each other then
1 m1m2 2
Loss in K.E of the system is K .E u1 u2
2 m1 m2
Coefficient of restitution:
Newton introduced a dimensionless parameter called the coefficient of restitution
(e) to measure the elasticity of collision. It is defined as the ratio of the relative
velocity of separation to the relative velocity of approach of the two colliding
Relative velocity of separation v 2 v1
bodies e=
Relative velocity of approach u1 u 2
This formula is applied along the line of impact. Here the velocities mentioned in
the expression should be taken along the line of impact.
For a perfectly elastic collision e 1
For an inelastic collision o e 1
For completely inelastic collision e 0
u1 u2 u1 u2
Before Before
v1 v2 v1 v2
After After
velocity of approach = u1u2 velocity of approach = u1+u2
velocity of separator = v2v1 velocity of separator = v2+v1
v v v v
e 2 1 e 1 2
u1 u2 u1 u2
A body dropped freely from a height ‘h’ strikes the floor and rebounds to a height h1
h1
e and after nth rebound hn e2n h
h
When a freely falling ball strikes the ground with a velocity ‘V’ and rebounds with
V1
a velocity V1 then e and after nth rebound Vn e nV
V
Total distance travelled by the ball before it stops bouncing
S h 2h1 2h2 2h3 ........ h 2e 2 h 2e 4 h 2e6 h ......
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 87
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
2 1 2e2 1 e 2 2e2
2 2 4
h 2e h 1 e e ...... h 2e h 1 e 2 h 1
1 e2 h 1 e2
1 e 2
S h 2
1 e
t
t1
t2
h t3
h1
h2
h3
Total time taken by the ball to stop bouncing
t 2t1 2t2 2t3 ........
2h 2h1 2h2 2h3 2h 2e 2 h 2e4 h 2e 6 h
2 2 2 .......... 2 2 2 ....
g g g g g g g g
2h 2h 2h 2h
2e 2e 2 2e 3 ....
g g g g
2h 2h
2e 1 e e 2 .......
g g
2h 2h 1 2h 2e 2h 1 e 2e 2h 1 e
2e 1
g g 1 e g 1 e g 1 e g 1 e
Change in momentum in 1st collision mv1 mu mv1 mu meu mu
mu 1 e .
2
Change in momentum in 2nd collision = m v2 v1 m e u eu meu 1 e
Total change in momentum after nth collision.
1 e 1 e
p mu 1 e e2 ...... U 2 gh mu m 2 gh
1 e 1 e
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 88
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
COLLISIONS_WORKSHEET-2
1. In a one dimensional elastic collision, the relative velocity of
approach before collision is equal to
1) sum of the velocities of the body
2) relative velocity of separation after collision
3) e times relative velocity of separation after collision
4) 1/e times relative velocity of separation after collision
2. A ball is released from some height which strikes the ground. If the collision is
perfectly elastic
1) The ball sticks to the ground
2) The ball rebounds to the same height
3) The ball rebounds to a greater height
4) The ball moves along the ground
3. In the above case, if the collision is perfectly inelastic
1) The ball rebounds to the same height
2) The ball rebounds to a greater height
3) The ball rebounds to a smaller height
4) The ball sticks to the ground
4. A ball hits the ground and rebounds after collision. In this process
1) Momentum of the ball is conserved
2) Momentum of the earth is conserved
3) Total momentum of the earth and ball is conserved
4) Total momentum of the earth and ball is not conserved
5. A bullet hits and gets embedded in a solid block resting on a horizontal frictionless
table, what is conserved?
1) Momentum and K.E 2) K.E alone
3) Momentum alone 4) Neither momentum nor K.E
6. The coefficient of restitution for a perfectly inelastic collision is
1) 1 2) 0 3) 4) –1
7. The co-efficient of restitutioin for a perfectly elastic collision is
1) 1 2) 0 3) 4) –1
8. A bullet hits horizontally and gets embedded in a solid block resting on a
frictionless surface. In this process:
1) momentum is conserved.
2) kinetic energy is conserved.
3) both momentum and K.E. are conserved.
4) neither momentum nor K.E. is conserved.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 89
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
9. In an inelastic collision
1) the initial kinetic energy is equal to the final kinetic energy
2) the final kinetic energy is less than the initial kinetic energy.
3) the kinetic energy remains constant
4) the kinetic energy first increases then decreases.
10. Th e collision in wh ich t h e r elat ive velocit y is zer o aft er collision is
1 ) per fect l y el ast i c 2 ) per fect l y i n el ast i c
3) par t i ally el ast ic
4 ) som et i m es el ast ic an d som et i m es in el ast i c
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A block of mass m moving at a speed v collides with another block of mass 2m at
rest. The lighter block comes to rest after the collision. Find the coefficient of
restitution.
1) 1/2 2) 1/3 3) 1/4 4) 1/5
2. Ball 1 collides directly with an another identical ball 2 at rest. Velocity of second
ball becomes two times that of 1 after collision. Find the coefficient of restitution
between the two balls ?
1) 1/2 2) 1/3 3) 1/4 4) 1/5
3. A 5kg mass moving at a speed of 3 ms 1 collides head on with a body of mass 1 kg
at rest, if they move with a common velocity after collision in the same direction,
the velocity is
1) 25 ms 1 2) 250 ms 1 3) 2.5 ms 1 4) 20 ms 1
4. A bullet of mass 50 grams going at a speed of 200 ms 1 strikes a wood block of
mass 950 gm and gets embedded in it. The velocity of the block after the impact
is
1) 5 ms 1 2) 10 ms 1 3) 20 ms 1 4) 50 ms 1
5. A body of mass 3 kg is moving with a velocity of 4 m/s towards right, collides head
on with a body of mass 4 kg moving in opposite direction with a velocity of 3 m/s.
After collision the two bodies stick together and move with a common velocity,
which is __________.
1) 1m/s 2) 0 m/s 3) 3 m/s 4) 4m/s
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 90
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
6. A body of mass m moving at a constant velocity v hits another body of the same
mass moving at the same velocity but in the opposite direction and sticks to it.
The common velocity after collision is
1) v 2) 0 3) 2v 4) v/2
Reasoning Type:
7. A body moving towards a finite body at rest collide with it.
Statement I : It is possible that both the bodies move after collision
Statement II : It is possible that the moving body comes to rest and the stationary
body starts moving
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement I.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Comprehension:
Two pendulum bobs of mass m and 2m collide elastically at the lowest point in
their motion. If both the balls are released from height H above the lowest point,
8. Velocity of the bob of mass m just after collision is
2 gH 5
1) 2) 2 gH 3) 2gH 4) None of these
3 3
9. The bob of mass m rise after the collision is
25 H H 16 H H
1) 2) 3) 4)
9 9 9 4
10. A 2 kg mass moving on a smooth frictionless surface with a velocity of 10ms 1 hits
another 2kg mass kept at rest, in an inelastic collision. After collision, if they
move together
1) they travel with a velocity of 5ms 1 in the same direction
2) they travel with a velocity of 10ms 1 in the same direction
3) they travel with a velocity of 10ms 1 in opposite direction
4) they travel with a velocity of in opposite direction
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 91
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
11. A rubber ball drops from a height h and after rebounding twice
from the ground, it rises to h/2. The co - efficient of restitution is
1/ 2 1/ 4 1/ 6
1 1 1 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
2 2 2 2
12. A ball is dropped on to a horizontal floor. It reaches a height of 144 cm on the
first bounce and 81 cm on the second bounce. The coefficient of restitution is
1) 0 2) 0.75 3) 81/144 4) 1
13. A ball is dropped from a height h above a tile floor and rebounds to a height of
0.64h. The coefficient of restitution between the ball and the floor is
1) 0.64 2) 0.8 3) 1/0.64 4) 1/0.8
14. A truck of mass 10 metric ton runs at 3 ms 1 along a level track and collides with
a loaded truck of mass 20 metric ton, standing at rest. If the trucks couple
together, the common speed after collision is
1) 1 ms 1 2) 0.1 ms1 3) 0.5 ms 1 4) 0.3 ms 1
15. A body dropped freely from a height h on to a horizontal plane, bounces up and
down and finally comes to rest. The coefficient of restitution is e. The ratio of
velocities at the beginning and after two rebounds is
1) 1 : e 2) e : 1 3) 1 : e² 4) e² : 1
Integer Answer Type:
16. A metal ball is released from a height of 32 m on a steel plate. If the coefficient
of restitution is 0.5, the height will the ball rise after second bounce is _______ m.
17. A ball A moving with velocity u, impinges directly on an equal ball
B, moving with velocity v in the opposite direction. If e is the coefficient of
restitution and ball A comes to rest after impact, find the ratio of u : v.
1 e 1 e e 1 e
1) 2) 3) 4)
1 e 1 e 1 e e
18. Three balls of masses m 1, m2 and m 3 are lying in straight line. The first ball is
moved with a certain velocity so that is strikes the second ball directly and itself
comes to rest. The second ball collides with the third and is itself comes to rest.
If ‘e’ be the coefficient of restitution for each ball, then choose the correct relation
1)m1m3 = m22 2)m1m3 = 2 m22 3)m1m3 = 5 m22 4)m1m3 = 4 m22
**********
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 92
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
COLLISIONS WORKSHEET-1 KEY
CUQ:1) 1 2) 3 3) 4 4) 1 5) 3 6) 3 7) 2 8) 1
9) 3 10) 2
JEE MAINS AND ADVANCED:
1) 1 2) 2 3) 2 4) 1 5) 3 6) 2 7) a-3;b-1,5;c-4;d-2
8) 1,3 9) 4 10) 4 11) 3 12) 1 13) 1 14) 1 15) 1
16) 2 17) 4 18) 2,3
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS
m m1 2m1
2. V21 2 V2 V1
m1 m2 m1 m2
3. m1u1 m1v1 m2v2
4. m1u1 m2 u 2 m1v1 m2 v2
5. m 1 u 1 m 1 v1 m 2 v 2 e=1
P12 P22 P
7. P1+P 2 = P further , K1 + K 2 = K or or 2 P12 P22 2 P 2
2m 4m 2m
Solving these two equations we get,
4 P K 8K
P2 P and P1 , K1 and K 2
3 3 9 9
8. There is no external force on the block. Internal forces break the block in two
parts. The linear momentum of the block before the break should, therefore, be
equal to the linear momentum of the two parts after the break. As all the velocities
M M
are in same direction, we get, M 20 m/s
30 m/s v
2 2
where v is the speed of the other part. From this equation v = 10 m/s. The change
in kinetic energy is
1M 1M 1 M m2 m2
2
30 m/s
2
10 m/s M 20 m/s
2
450 50 400 2 50 2 M
22 22 2 2 s s
m2
M 50 2
s 1
Hence, the fractional change in the kinetic energy
1 2 4
M 20 m/s
2
14. Since the two massess exchange their velocities they should have equal mass.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 93
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
COLLISIONS WORKSHEET-2_KEY
CUQ:1) 2 2) 2 3) 4 4) 3 5) 3 6) 2 7) 1 8) 1
9) 2 10) 2
JEE MAINS AND ADVANCED:
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 2 5) 2 6) 2 7) 2
8) 2 9) 1 10) 1 11) 3 12) 2 13) 2 14) 1
15) 3 16) 2 17) 2 18) 1
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS
JEE-MAINS
1. Suppose the second block moves at a speed v’ after the collision. By conservation
of momentum, m v 2mv| or, v| v/2
Hence, the velocity of separation
= v/2 and the velocity of approach = v.
By definition, velocity of separation
e 1/2 .
velocity of approach
2. Let us take left wards as –ve and right ward as +ve.
| |
m1 m v1 v m2 m v2 0 v1 v| v2 2v|
From the conservation of linear momentum mv 0 m1v m2 2v
| |
v 3v| - - - - - - - - - -(1)
| |
v v1 v2 v| 2v| v| v| v 1
v| ; e
3 v2 v1 0v v v 3v 3
1
Coefficient of restitution between two balls =
3
.
m1u1 m2u2
3. vc
m1 m2
m 1u 1 m 2 u 2
4. v m1 m 2
5.
u1 = 4 m/s u2 = 3 m/s
m1 = 3 kg m2 = 4 kg
m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2)v
3 × 4 + 4 ×(–3) = (3 + 4)v v = 0
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 94
CLASS IX-PHYSICS COLLISSIONS
m1u1 m2u2
6. m1 m2
m m2 2m2
8. v1 1 u1 u2 ; v1 m m 2 2 gH 4m 2 gH 5 2gH
m1 m2 m1 m2 m 2m m 2m 3
2
5
2 2 gH
v 3 , h 25 H
9. h1 1 1
2g 2g 9
11. h e 2 n .h
n
12. e h2
h1
13. e h2
h1
14. v m1mu1 mm2 u 2
1 2
15. vn en .v
4
1 32 1
16. hn he2n 32 2m , here n 2, e
2
16 2
17. Let ‘m’ be the mass of each ball A and B. From, principle of conservation of linear
momentum, mu mv mv ' u v v ' - - - - - - - (1)
(where v2 is the velocity of ball B after impact).
From Newton’s experimental law,
u v
v1=0 v2
+ve
A B A B
Before impact After impact
(vel. of separation) = e (vel. of approach) v2 e u v - - - - - - - -(2)
u v 1
From eqns. (1) and (2) we have e u v u v or
u v e
u 1 e
From component and dividend or
v 1 e
**********
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 95
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
GRAVITATION
MEMO GRAPH
Gravitation
Theories of Newton’s universal
Gravitation law of Gravitation
Relation between
GM
Ptolemy Copernicus Kepler’s g and G is g R 2
Theory Theory laws
Law of Factors affecting g
Law of Law of
Orbits areas periods
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 96
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
Subramanya Chandrasekhar was born in Lahore. While studying
the constitution of the stars he has proved that the maximum
mass that a ‘white dwarf can have is 1.4 times the solar mass.
This mass is known as chandrasekhar limit. If a star crosses
this limit, it has to face catostrophic collapse. Chandrasekhar
got Nobel prize for physics in 1982. He was so passionate about
the study of stars, when he died it was remarked that the stars
were orphaned by his demise.
GRAVITATION
Gravitation and gravity:
The earth attracts (or pulls) all the objects towards its centre. The force with
which the earth pulls the objects towards it is called the gravitational force of
earth or gravity (of earth). It is due to the gravitational force of earth that all the
objects fall towards the earth when released from a height.
The gravitational force of earth (or gravity of earth) is responsible for holding the
atmosphere above the earth; for the rain falling to the earth and for the flow of water
in the rivers. It is also the gravitational force of earth and for the flow of water in the
rivers. It is also the gravitational force of earth(or gravity of earth)which keeps us
firmly on the ground.
Gravitation:
Every body in this universe attracts every other body with a force known as ‘force of
gravitation’. Gravitation is the force of attraction between any two bodies in the
universe. The attraction between the sun and the earth, the attraction between a
table and a chair lying in a room, the attraction between the earth and a satellite
revolving around it, etc.; are all examples of gravitation.
Gravity:
Gravity is a special case of gravitation. Gravity is the attraction between the earth and
any object lying on or near its surface. A body thrown up falls back on the surface of
the earth due to earth’s force of gravity.
Universal law of gravitation or Newton’s law of gravitation:
The law states that everybody in this universe attracts every other body with a force
which is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional
to the square of the distance between their centres.
Note:- The force acts along the line joining centres of the two bodies.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 97
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
Relation between gravitational force between two bodies and the distance
between them.
Consider two bodies A and B having masses M and m respectively. Let the distance
between these bodies be r.
M Force on Force on m
A due to B B due to A
A B
F F
r
If F is the force with which the two bodies attract each other, then according to the
1
law of gravitation F Mm .........(1) and F 2 .....(2)
r
Mm Mm
Combining eqns. (1) and (2), we get F 2 or F G 2 .....(3)
r r
where G is constant and is known as universal gravitational constant.
Eqn (3) gives the magnitude of gravitational force between two interacting bodies of
masses M and m separated by distance ‘r’.
Watch out!
The equation (3) implies that force exerted by earth on an apple is same as the force
exerted by apple on the earth
Definition of universal gravitational constant (G):
Mm Fr 2
We know, F or G
r2 Mm
If M = 1 unit, m = 1 unit and r = 1 unit, then G = F
Thus, universal gravitational constant (G) is defined as the force of attraction between
two bodies of unit masses separated by a unit distance.
Units of universal gravitational constant (G):
2
Fr 2 unit of force unit of dis tan ce
We know, F GMm or G G
r 2
Mm unit of mass unit of mass
Since S.I. unit of force is newton (N).
S.I. unit of distance is metre (m), S.I. unit of mass is kilogram (kg).
Nm2
S.I. unit of G or Nm2 kg 2
kg 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 98
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
Numerical value of gravitational constant G:
Henry Cavendish first determined the value of G experimentally in the year 1778, by
using a sensitive balance.
The numerical value of G is experimentally found to be 6.67 × 10–11Nm2Kg–2.
Newton’s law of gravitation is known as universal law of gravitation:
This is because the law of gravitation holds good for any pair of bodies in the universe,
whether the bodies are big or small, or whether they are celestial or terrestrial.
Characteristics of Gravitational force:
1. Gravitational force between two bodies or objects does not need any contact
between them. It means, gravitational force is action at a distance.
2. Gravitational force between two bodies varies inversely proportional to the square
of the distance between them, Hence, gravitational force is an inverse square force.
3. The gravitational forces between two bodies or objects from an action reaction
pair. If object A attracts object B with a force F1 and the object B attracts object A
with a force F2, then F1 = – F2
F2 F1
A B
Free fall:
The falling of a body (or object) from a height towards the earth under the gravitational
force of earth (with no other forces acting on it) is called free fall.
KEY POINTS
1) The acceleration of an object falling freely towards the earth does not
depend on the mass of the object. Hence it is same for bodies of any mass
2) A freely falling body has acceleration equal to acceleration due to gravity (g).
3) The acceleration produced in the freely falling bodies is the same for all
the bodies and its does not depend on the mass of the falling body.
Acceleration due to gravity:
The acceleration with which a body falls towards the earth due to earth’s gravitational
pull is known as acceleration due to gravity. It is denoted by ‘g’.
Expression for the acceleration due to gravity (Relation between G and g)
Consider a body of mass m near the surface of the earth
m
O
Earth
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 99
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
The force acting on the body is the gravitational force of the earth. The magnitude
of the gravitational force acting on the body due to the earth is given by
GMm
F ......(1)
R2
where, M = mass of the earth, R = radius of the earth
[Here, height of the body from the surface of the earth is neglected as compared
to the radius of the earth because R = 6400 km is very large.]
This gravitational force (F) produces acceleration equal to ‘g’ in the body of mass
m. So according to Newton’s second law of motion,
F = mg _____________(2)
GMm GM
Equating equations(1) and (2) mg 2
or g 2 __________(3)
R R
which is the expression for the acceleration due to gravity.
Do you know ?
1. The force between two material bodies is not affected by the int erventing medium
G is very small-hence gravitational forces are verty small, unless one(or both) of the
masses is huge
GRAVITATION WORKSHEET -1
1. Gravitional force is
1) Mass and charge dependent
2) Mass and charge independent
3) Mass dependent and charge independent
4) Mass independent and charge dependent
2. Gravitional force between two bodies exists
1) When they are in contact only 2) When they are not incontact only
3) Any of the above two cases 4) None of these
3. The force with which the earth pulls the objects towards it is called
1) Gravitational force 2) Frictional force
3) Normal force 4) Tension force
4. Every body in the universe attracts every other body with a force known as
1) Force of friction 2) Force of repulsion
3) Force of gravitation 4) both(1) & (2)
5. Universal law of Gravitation was proposed by________.
1) Pascal 2) Newton 3) Archimede’s 4) C.V.Raman
6. The gravitational force acting between two bodies is always_____
1) repulsive 2) attractive 3) zero 4) both (1) and (2)
7. The gravitational constant (G) is a_______
1) scalar 2) vector 3) both (1) and (2) 4) neither (1) nor (2)
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 100
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
8. Gravity is a___________quantity
1) vector 2) scalar 3) both (1) and (2) 4) neither (1) nor (2)
9. The acceleration due to gravity does not depend upon
1) mass of the body 2) shape or size of the body
3) both (1) and (2) 4) neither (1) nor (2)
10. Newton’s laws of motion failed to explain
1) The existence of gravity between bodies
2) The non dependence of the intervening medium between the bodies on the
gravitional field
3)The reason for the variation of gravitational force with square of distance
between the bodies
4) All the above
11. Two bodies at a certain separation experience some gravitational force. If they
are brought into contact the gravitional force between them.
1) Increases 2) Decreases 3) Remains the same 4) Becomes
zero
12. Universal law of gravitation is derived from
1. Kepler’s law 2. Aryabhattiyam
3. Einsteins equation 4. Newton’s law of motion
13. Newton’s laws of motion do not apply when
1. The bodies are moving with smaller velocities
2. The bodies are at rest
3. The bodies are moving with velocities comparable to the velocity of light
4. The bodies move with uniform velocities
14. Newton’s laws of motion are applicable for
1. The gravitional fields which are very strong
2. The gravitional fields which are not strong
3. The gravitional fields which are weak as well as strong
4. All bodies which move with the speed of light
15. Gravitional force can be called as
1. Force without any field 2. Force at a distance
3. Contact force 4. Fictitious force
16. How nature appears when viewed from different inertial frames is explained by
1. Planck’s theory 2. Newton’s theory
3. Einstein’s special theory of relativity 4. All the above
17. Newton’s law of gravitation is universal because
1. It is always attractive
2. It acts on all the masses at all distances and not affected by the medium
3. It acts on all bodies and particles
4. No reason
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 101
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
18. Which of the following interaction is the weakest ?
1. Gravitational 2. Electrostatic 3. Nuclear 4. Electro magnetic
19. The unit of the quantity g/G in SI will be
1. kg m2 2. kg m2 3. m2kg 1
4. kg 2m1
20. The gravitional force between two bodies does not depend upon
1. Their separation 2. Product of their masses
3. Both 4. None
JEE-MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. The value of G depends upon
1. The masses of bodies 2. The medium between the bodies
3. The temperature of bodies 4. None of these
2. Force of gravitation can be between
1) Moon and the earth 2) Sun and the earth
3) Moon and the sun 4) All of these
Gm1m2
3. F is valid
r2
1) Between bodies with any shape 2) Between particles
3) Between any bodies with uniform density 4) Between any bodies with
same shape
4. Fg, Fe and Fn represent the gravitational, electro-magnetic and nuclear forces
respectively, then arrange the increasing order of their strengths
1) Fn, Fe, Fg 2) Fg, Fe, Fn
3) Fe, Fg, Fn 4) Fg, Fn, Fe
5. Find the false statement
1) Gravitational force acts along the line joining the two interacting particles
2) Gravitational force is independent of medium
3) Gravitational force forms an action-reaction pair
4) Gravitational force does not obey the principle of superposition.
6. Law of gravitation is not applicable if
A) Velocity of moving objects are comparable to velocity of light
B) Gravitational field between objects whose masses are greater than the mass of
sun.
1) A is true, B is false 2) A is false, B is true
3) Both A & B are true 4) Both A&B are false
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 102
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
7. Among the following find the wrong statement
1) Law of gravitation is framed using Newton’s third law of motion
2) Law of gravitation cannot explain why gravity exists
3) Law of gravitation does not explain the presense of force even when the
particles are not in physical contact
4) When the range is long, gravitational force becomes repulsive.
8. Out of the following interactions the weakest is
1) gravitational 2) electromagnetic 3) nuclear 4) electrostatic
9. Attractive Force is exists between two protons inside the Nucleous this is due to
1) Gravitiaonal Forces 2) Electro magnetic Forces
3) Weak Nuclear Forces 4) Strong Nuclear Forces
10. Repulsive force exist between two protons out side the nucleous this due to
1) Gravitiaonal Forces 2) Electro magnetic Forces
3) Weak Nuclear Forces 4) Strong Nuclear Forces
11. Which of the following is the evidence to show that there must be a force acting
on earth and directed towards Sun?
1) Apparent motion of sun around the earth
2) Phenomenon of day and night
3) Revolution of earth round the Sun
4) Deviation of the falling body towards earth
12. If suddenly the gravitational force of attraction between earth and satellite
revolving around it becomes zero, then the satellite will (AIEEE 2002)
1) Continue to move in its orbit with same velocity
2) Move tangential to the original orbit with the same velocity
3) Becomes sationary in its orbit
4) Move towards the earth
13. Two identical trains A and B move with equal speeds on parallel tracks along the
equator. A moves from east to west and B moves from west to east. Which train
will exert greater force on the track?
1) A 2) B 3) they will exert equal force
4) The mass and the speed of each train must be known to reach a conclusion.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 103
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
14. Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform density the acceleration due to
gravity
1) at a point outside the earth is inversely proportional to the square of its distance
from the centre
2) at a point outside the earth is inversely proportional to its distance from the
centre
3) at a point inside is zero
4) at a point inside is inversely proportional to its distance from the centre.
15. The tidal waves in the sea are primarily due to
1) the gravitational effect of the moon on the earth
2) the gravitational effect of the sun on the earth
3) the gravitational effect of the venus on the earth
4) the atmospheric effect of the earth itself
16. If F1 is the force of attractionm for the bodies at separation r1and F2 is
the force for the separation r2, then
1) F1r12 F2r2 2) F1r1 F2 r22 3) F1r12 F2r22 4) F1r1 F2r2
17. The force of attraction between two bodies of masses 1gram each separated by a
distance of 1 metere is
1. 6.67 10 11 N 2. 6.67 10 8 N 3. 6.67 10 17 N 4. 6.67 1017 N
18. Two brass balls of masses 2 kg and 0.5 kg experience a force of attraction of 2N.
when the distance between their centres is doubled. the force of attraction is
1. 1/2 N 2. 1/4 N 3. 1N 4. 2 N
19. Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are separated by certain distance If F12 is the force
on m1 due to m2 and F21 is the force on m2 due to m1 , then
1. F12 F21 2. F12 F21 3. F12 F21 4. None
20. You are given a total mass M. How do you divide it into two parts so that the
gravitational force between them at a distance is maximum ?
m 3m m 2m m 4m m m
1. , 2. , 3. , 4. ,
4 4 3 3 5 5 2 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 104
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
Factors on which the acceleration due to gravity depends:
Acceleration due to gravity is
i) directly proportional to the mass of the earth and
ii) inversely proportional to the square of the radius of the earth.
The value of acceleration due to gravity (g) on the earth:
GM
We know, g
R2
Now, G = 6.673 × 10–11 Nm2kg–2 ,
M = 5.98 × 1024 kg (Mass of earth)
R = 6.4 × 106 m (Radius of earth). Substituting these values in equation (1), we get
6.673 10 11 Nm2kg 2 5.98 1024 kg
g 2 = 9.8 Nkg–1 = 9.8 kgms–2kg–1= 9.8 ms–2
6.4 10 m
6
Value of ‘g’ on the surface of the moon:
GMm
We know, g moon R 2 ........(1)
m
Mm (mass of the moon) = 7.4 × 1022 kg,
Rm (radius of the moon) = 1.75 × 106 m
G = 6.673 × 10–11 Nm2kg–2
11 2 2
Then, from eqn. (1) gmoon 6.673 10 Nm kg 7.4 1022 kg = 1.6 ms–2
2
1.75 106 m
g moon 1.7ms 2 1 1
Now, or g moon g earth
g earth 9.8ms 2
6 6
1
Thus, acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon is the times the acceleration
6
due to gravity on the surface of the earth.
Variation in the value of ‘g’:
1. Variation in the value of ‘g’ with the shape of the earth;
The acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ on the surface of the earth is given by
GM
G _______________(1)
R2
This expression for ‘g’ is calculated by considering the earth as a spherical body. In
fact, the earth is not spherical in shape but it is egg shaped as shown in figure.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 105
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
Pole
RP
Equator
O RE
Therefore, the radius of the earth (R) is not constant throughout. Hence, the
value of ‘g’ is different at different points on the earth.
The equatorial radius (RE) of the earth is about 21 km longer than its polar radius
(Rp).
GM
Now from equation (1) value of ‘g’ at equator is given by g e _________(2)
R 2p
GM
Value of ‘g’ at pole is given by g p ____________(3)
R 2p
2
g R
Dividing equation (3) by equation (2), we get p E
g E R p
Since RE > RP gp > gE
Thus, value of ‘g’ is more at equator than at poles.
2. Variation in the value of ‘g’ with the altitude (or height) above the surface of
the earth.
We know, acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth is given by
GM
g .....(1)
R2
Now, let a body be at a height h above the surface of the earth.
B
h
A
Re
O
Earth
The distance of the body from the centre of the earth = (R + h).
Therefore, acceleration due to gravity at height ‘h’ is given by
GM
gh 2 .....(2)
R h
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 106
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
gh GM R2 R2
Dividing (2) by (1) we get 2
2
g R h GM R h
2
gh R
or .....(3)
g R h
gh
Since (R + h) > R g 1 or gh < g
This shows that the value of ‘g’ decreases as we go higher and higher.
Thus, value of ‘g’ decreases with the height from the surface of the earth.
3. Variation in the value of ‘g’ with depth below the surface of the earth.
The value of ‘g’ decreases with depth below the surface of the earth.
The value of ‘g’ at depth d below the surface of the earth is given by
d R d
g d 1 g gd g
R R
This shows that the value of ‘g’ decreases as we go deep into the crest of the
earth.
Note:-At the centre of the earth, depth, d = R
g (at centre of he earth) = 0
Thus, value of ‘g’ at the centre of the earth is zero.
4. Effect of latitude (Effect of rotation of the earth about its own axis). Due to
the rotational motion of the earth about its own axis, the value of g at a place
increases with the increase in latitude of the place. Hence due to rotation of the
earth, the weight of a body is maximum at the poles and minimum at the equator.
In fact rotation has no effect on the value of g at the poles.
Gravity meters:sensitive instrument used to measure small changes in the value
of g at a given location are called gravity meters.
KEY POINTS:
1. g is independent of mass, shape and size of 'falling body', i.e., a given reference body
produces same acceleration in a light and heavy falling body.
2. g is not a universal constant and depends on place, position and planet.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 107
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
GRAVITATION WORKSHEET - 2
1. The value of g at poles____.
1) maximum 2) minimum 3) constant 4) zero
2. The value of ‘g’ at the equator
1) maximum 2) minimum 3) constant 4) zero
3. The acceleration due to the gravity at the centre of the earth is
1) infinite 2) zero 3) 9.8 m/s2 4) all of these
4. The value of acceleration due to gravity decreases with __________in height from
the surface of earth
1) decreases 2) increases 3) remain same 4) both (1) and
(2)
5. The value of acceleration due to gravity decreases with _________in depth inside
the earth.
1) decreases 2) increases 3) remain same 4) both (1) and
(2)
6. The value of acceleration due to gravity above the surface of the earth is inversely
proportional to
1) square of the distance of that point from the centre of earth.
2) distance of that point from the centre of earth
3) square root of the distance of that point from the centre of earth.
4) cube of the distance of that point from the centre of earth
7. The value of acceleration due to gravity below the surface of the earth is directly
proportional to________.
1) square of the distance of that point from the centre of earth.
2) distance of that point from the centre of earth
3) square root of the distance of that point from the centre of earth.
4) cube of the distance of that point from the centre of earth
8. The instrument used to measure the value of ‘g’ at a given location is called
1) Thermometer 2) Barometer 3) Gravity meter 4) Manometer
9. If the speed of rotation of earth about its axis increases, then the weight of the
body at the equator will
1) increase 2) decrease
3) remainunchanged 4) sometimesdecrease and sometimes increase
10. The ratio of acceleration due to gravity at a depth ‘h’ below the surface of earth
and at a height ‘h’ above the surface for h<<R
1) constant only when h<<R 2) increases linearly with h
3) increases parabolically with h 4) decreases
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 108
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
11. If the gravitational force of earth suddenly disappears, then which of the following
is correct?
1) weight of the body is zero 2) mass of the body is zero
3) both mass and weight become zero 4) neither the weight nor the mass is
zero
12. Average density of the earth
1) does not depend on ‘g’ 2) is a complex function of ‘g’
3) is directly proportional to ‘g’ 4) is inversely proportional to ‘g’
13. A person will get more quantity of matter in Kg-Wt at
1) poles 2) at lattitude of 600 3) equator 4) satellite
14. Two identical trains A and B move with equal speeds on parallel tracks along the
equator. A moves from east to west and B moves from west to east. Which train will
exert greater force on the track?
1) A 2) B
3) they will exert equal force
4) The mass and the speed of each train must be known to reach a conclusion.
15. If earth were to rotate faster than its present speed, the weight of an object
1) increase at the equator but remain unchanged at poles
2) decrease at the equator but remain unchanged at the poles
3) remain unchanged at the equator but decrease at the poles
4) remain unchanged at the equator but increase at the poles
16. A body of mass 5 kg is taken into space. Its mass becomes.
1) 5 kg 2) 10 kg 3) 2 kg 4) 30 kg
17. Earth is flattend at poles and bulging at equators this is due to
1) revolution of earth around the sun is an elliptical orbit
2) angular of velocity of spining about its axis is more at equator
3) centrifugal force is more at equator than poles
4) more centrifugal force at poles than equator
18. Consider earth to be a homogeneous sphere. Scientist A goes deep down in a
mine and scientist B goes high up in a baloon. The gravitational field measured
by
1) A goes on decreasing and that of B goes on increasing
2) B goes on decreasing and that of A goes on increasing
3) Each decreases at the same rate
4) Each decreases at different rates.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 109
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
JEE-MAINS
SINGLE CORRECT CHOICE TYPE:
1. Find the value of acceleration due to gravity at a height of 12,800 km from the
surface of the earth.Earth radius = 6,400 km
1)1.7 m/s2 2)1.09 m/s2 3)2.09 m/s2 4)4.09 m/s2
2. Density of earth in terms of ‘g’ is acceleration due to gravity,M is
mass of the earth,R is radius of earth
3g 3G 4G 4G
1) 2) 3) 4)
4RG 4Rg 3Rg 3Rg
3. If g on the surface of the earth is 9.8 m / s 2 , its value at a height of 6400 km is
(Radius of the earth = 6400km).
1) 4.9ms–2 2) 9.8ms–2 3)2.45ms–2 4)19.6ms–2
4. If g on the surface of the earth is 9.8ms 2 , its value at a depth of 3200km (Radius of
the earth = 6400km) is
1) 9.8ms 2 2) zero 3) 4.9ms 2 4) 2.45ms 2
5. The mass of a body on the surface of the earth is 70 kg. What willbe its (i) mass and
(ii) weight at an altidue of 100 km? Radius of the earth is 6371 km.
1) 70 kg, 664.46 N 2) 70 kg, 66.446 N
3) 70 kg, 6.6446 N 4) 70 kg, 6644.6 N
6. The mass of the body on the surface of the earth 80kg. What is the weight at an
altitude of 10km?(Radius of earth is 6371 km)
1) 664N 2) 784N 3) 1000N 4) 7.84N
7. Density of earth is 5.488 ×103 kgm–3. Assume earth to be a hemogeneous
sp[here. Find the value g on the surface of the earth. Use the known
values of R and G
1) 8.9 ms–2 2) 9.8 ms–2 3) 8.9 ms–1 4) 9.8 ms–1
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 110
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
8. The radius and density of two artificial satellites are R1 , R2 and respectively.
The ratio of acceleration due to gravities on them will be
R2 2 R1 2 R1 1 R2 1
1) 2) 3) 4)
R1 1 R2 1 R2 2 R1 2
9. A body of 200 kg wt is lying in the surface of the earth.Find its weight at a place
‘R’ above the surface of the earth (Radius of the earth is R)
1) 25 kg wt 2)100 kg wt 3) 50 kg wt 4) remains same
10. Two planets are of the same material but their radii are in the ratio 2 : 1. Then
ratio of acceleration due to gravity on those two planets is
1) 2 : 1 2) 1 : 2 3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4
11. If ‘w’ is the weight of a body on the surface of the earth, its weight at a height
equal to radius of the earth would be
1) w/2 2) 2w 3) w/4 4) 4w
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 111
CLASS IX-PHYSICS GRAVITATION
GRAVITATION_WORKSHEET-I_KEY
CUQ:1) 3 2) 3 3) 1 4) 3 5) 2 6) 2 7) 1
8) 1 9) 3 10) 4 11) 1 12) 4 13) 3 14) 2
15) 2 16) 3 17)2 18) 1 19) 1 20) 4
JEE MAINS AND ADVANCED:
1) 4 2) 4 3) 2 4) 2 5) 4 6) 3 7) 4 8) 1 9) 4
10) 2 11) 3 12) 2 13) 1 14) 1 15) 1 16) 3 17) 3
18) 1 19) 3 20 4
GRAVITATION_WORKSHEET-2_KEY
CUQ:1) 1 2) 2 3) 2 4) 2 5) 2 6) 1 7) 2 8) 3
9) 2 10) 2 11) 1 12) 3 13) 3 14) 1 15) 2 16) 1
17) 3 18) 4
JEE MAINS
1) 2 2) 1 3) 3 4) 3 5) 1 6) 2 7) 2 8) 3
9) 3 10) 1 11) 3
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS
1 d
3. g 4. g ' g 1
R2 R
5. Mass m = 70 kg Weight on the surface of the earth = mg = 70 × 9.8 = 686 N
The mass of the body at the altidue of 100 km is also the same as that on the surface
of the earth i.e., 70 kg
Weight of the body at a height h is mg`; h = 100 × 103 m = 105 m
2h 2 105
Weight = mg mg 1 70 9.8 1 664.46N
R 6371 103
7. g 4RGD / 3 4 3.14 6371 103 6.67 1011 5.488 103 / 3 9.8ms 2
8. g R
**********
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 112
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS
CONTENTS
Introduction
Density and pressure
Density of liquid
Pressure in a fluid
Pascal’s law
Pressure difference in accelerating fluids
Archimedes’ principle
Law of floatation
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 113
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
MEMO GRAPH
FLUID MECHANICS
Solids Fluids
Thrust
Pr essure
Area
Accelerating
fluids
Upward Pascal’s Downword Archimede’s Lateral
pressure law pressure principle pressure
Hydraulic Applications of Buoyant force Streamline
pressure Archimede’s in accelerating flow and tubes
principle fluids flow
Relative Relative
density of density of
solid liquid
Equation of Bernoulli’s
continuity theorem
Speed of efflux Torricelli’s
theorem
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 114
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
KNOW YOUR SCIENTIST
Bernoulli (1700 - 1782)
Bernoulli, a swiss physicist and mathematician, made
important discoveries in fluid dynamics and published
‘Hydrodynamica’ in 1738. In this famous work he incorporated
theoretical and practical study of equilibrium, pressure, and
speed in fluids. Along with Leonard Euler Bernoulli won the
French Academy prize for mathematics ten times. He also
studied medinine and worked as a professor of anatomy and
Bernoulli Botany for a short period at Basle, Switzerland.
(1700 - 1782)
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS SYNOPSIS-1
1. INTRODUCTION
The substances which flow are called fluids. Fluids include both liquids and gases.
The science of fluids at rest is called fluid statics while that of moving fluids is
hydro-dynamics. Fluid statics includes hydrostatic pressure, floatation, Pascal’s
law and Archimedes’ principle while hydrodynamics includes continuity equation
Bernoullis principle and Torricell’s theorem. This all the subject of this chapter.
2. DENSITY AND PRSSURE
While dealing with fluids we are more interested in properties that vary from
point to point in the extended substance rather than properties of a small piece of
the substance. This is why we talk about density and pressure rather than mass
and force in case of fluids.
3. DENSITY OF LIQUID
i) Density ( ) of any substance is defined as the mass per unit volume or
mass m
or
volume v
ii) Relative Density (R.D)
In case of a liquid, sometimes an another term relative density (R.D.) is
defined. It is the ratio of density of the substance to the density of water 4°C.
Density of subs tance
Hence, R.D
Density of water at 4C
R.D. is a pure ratio. So, it has no units. It is also sometimes referred as specific
gravity. Density of water at 4°C in CGS is 1 gm/cm3. Therefore, numerically the
R.D. and density of substance (in CGS) are equal, In SI units the density of water
at 4°C is 1000 kg/m3. Hence; Density of substance in S.I.units = R.D × 1000.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 115
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
Ex: If R.D of kerosene is 0.8 then desity in C.G.S is 0.8 gm/cm3 and density in S.I
is 0.8 × 1000 = 800 kg/m3.
iii) Density of a mixture of two or more liquids
Here, we have two cases.
Case 1: Suppose two liquids of densities 1 and 2 having masses, m1 and m2 are
mixed together. Then the density of the mixture will be
Total mass m1 m2
m1 m2 212
If m1 = m2, then
Total volume V1 V2 m1 m2
1 2
1 2
Case 2: If two liquids of densities 1 and 2 having volumes V1 and V2 are mixed,
then the density of the mixture is,
Total mass m1 m2 1V1 2V2 1 2
If V1 = V2, then
Total volume V1 V2 V1 V2 2
Note:
1. Density of substance means the ratio of mass of substance to the volume occupied
by the substance while density of a body means the ratio of mass of a body to
the volume of the body. So for a solid body
Density of body = Density of substance
while for a hollow body, density of body is lesser than that of substance
[ as Vbody > Vsub].
2. When immiscible liquids of different densities are poured in a container, the
liquid of highest density will be at the bottom while that of lowest density at the
top and interfaces will be plane.
3. PRESSURE IN A FLUID
When a fluid (either liquid or gas) is at rest, it exerts a force perpendicular to any
surface in contact with it, such as a container wall or a body immersed in the
fluid.
While the fluid as a whole is at rest, the molecules that makes up the fluid are in
motion, the force exerted by the fluid is due to molecules colliding with their
surroundings.
If we think of an imaginary surface within the fluid, the fluid on the two sides of
the surface exerts equal and opposite forces on the surface, otherwise the surface
would accelerate and the fluid would not remain at rest.
dA
dF dF
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 116
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
Consider a small surface of area dA centered on a point on the fluid, the normal
force exerted by the fluid on each side is dF^ . The pressure P is defined at that
dF
point as the normal force per unit area, i.e., P
dA
If the pressure is the same at all points of a finite plane surface with area A,
F
then P
A
Where F is the normal force on one side of the surface. The SI unit of pressure
is pascal, where 1 pascal = 1 Pa = 1.0 N/m2
One unit used principally in meterology is the Bar which is equal to 10 5 Pa.
1 Bar = 105 Pa
4. Atmospheric Pressure (P0)
It is pressure of the earth’s atmosphere. This changes with weather and
elevation. Normal atmospheric pressure at sea level (an average value) is
1.013 × 105 Pa. Thus, 1 atm = 1.013 × 105 Pa = 1.013 Bar
Note: Fluid pressure acts perpendicular to any surface in the fluid no matter
how that surface is oriented. Hence, pressure has no intrinsic direction of its
own, its a scalar. By contrast, force is a vector with a definite direction.
5. Absolute Pressure and Gauge Pressure
The excess pressure above atmospheric pressure is usually called gauge
pressure and the total pressure is called absolute pressure. Thus,
Gauge pressure = absolute pressure – atmospheric pressure
6. Mathematical Expression for Pressure in Fluids:
Consider a liquid contained in a beaker, such that ‘ ’ is the density of liquid.
Consider a point B at the base of liquid and the liquid column of area cross-
section ‘a’ around it, such that ‘h’ is the height of the liquid column.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 117
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
Volume of imaginary column of liquid = area of cross-section x length = a.h.
Mass of liquid column = volume x density = v
Weight of liquid column = mass x g = mg = a.h . .g
Trust exerted by liquid column on the base of the beaker = a.h . .g
Force F a.h . .g
Pressure due to liquid column = P
Area a a
P h ..g
7. Factors on which the pressure at a point in fluids depends
1. Pressure in a fluid is directly proportional to its height (or depth).
2. Pressure in a fluid is directly proportional to its density.
3. Pressure in a fluid is directly proportional to the acceleration due to gravity
4. Pressure in a fluid is independent of the area of cross-section.
5. If P A is pressure due to atmosphere then total pressure at the point B is
PA h g
8. Laws of Liquid Pressure
Following are the laws of Liquid Pressure:
1. Pressure at a point inside the liquid increases with the depth from the free
surface of the liquid.
2. Pressure at a point inside the liquid at a given depth increases with the
increase in the density of the liquid.
3. Pressure is same in all directions, about a given point within the liquid.
4. Pressure is same at all points in the horizontal plane at a given depth in a
stationary liquid.
5. A liquid seeks its own level.
Note:
i) At same point n a fluid pressure is same in all directions.
In the figure, P1 = P2 = P3 = P4
P4
P1 P3
P2
ii) Forces acting on a fluid in equilibrium have to be perpendicular to its surface.
iii) In the same liquid pressure will be same at all points at the same level.
For example, in the figure.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 118
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
p0
1 p0
1 h1 2 2 h2
3 4
5 6
P1 P2 , P3 = P4 and P5 = P6 ; Further, P3 = P4
1
P0 1gh1 P0 2gh2 or p1h1 2 h2 or h
iv) In case of a given mass of an ideal gas at constant temperature
1
V or pV = const. This law is called Boyle’s law.
P
9. BAROMETER:
It is a device used to measure atmospheric pressure.
Vacuum
(P=0)
h
1
2
In principle, any liquid can be used to fill the barometer, but mercury is the
substance of choice because its great density makes possible an instrument of
reasonable size.
P1 = P2 Here, P1 = atmospheric pressure (P0) and P2 0 gh gh
Here, density of mercury P0 gh
Thus, the mercury barometer reads the atmospheric pressure (P0) directly from
the height of the mercury column. For example if the height of mercury in a
barometer is 760 mm, then atmospheric pressure will be,
P0 gh = (13.6 × 103)(9.8)(0.760) = 1.01 × 105 N/m2
9. MANOMETER:
It is a device used to measure the pressure of a gas inside a container. The U-
shaped tube often contains mercury. P1 = P2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 119
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
P0
h
1 2
Hg
Here, P1 = pressure of the gas in the container (P) and P2 = atmospheric pressure
P0 gh P P0 hg
This can also be written as P – P0 = gauge pressure = hg
Here, is the density of the liquid used in U-tube.
Thus by measuring h we can find absolute (or gauge) pressure in the vessel.
SCIENTIFIC FACT
How does a pressure cooker works?
The principle of a pressure cooker is cooking under increased pressure. It is well
known that food gets cooked fast at high temperatures. Generally we cook food in water
kept in open vessels. In these vessels, when the water is heated to 100degrees centigrade
it begins to boil, becomes steam and escapes. Thus there is no possibility of heating the
water beyond 100 degrees in open vessels. Hence it takes a lot of time to cook the food.
From physics, we know the boiling point increases with inverse in pressure. Hence
in pressure cookers, the steam is not allowed to escape but enclosed with in the vessel. As
more water is converted into gaseous steam, the pressure increases which in a feed back
mechanism increases the boiling point to well beyond 100 degrees enabling fast cooking.
Normally the temperature reaches about 120 degrees inside the pressure cooker.
The fundamental equation in physics that relates pressure(P), volume (V) and
temperature(T) is given by Boyle’s law.
PV = k T where k is a constant
According to the equation, if V is kept constant as in a pressure cooker and P or T is
increased, the other parameter increases. In the cooler, both of them increase to enable
fast cooking.
In order that the pressure does not reach very high values so as to cause an
explosion, a weight and safety valve are provided to let out the excess steam. Also the
body of the cooker is made of an alloy which can withstand high pressures
10. Pascal’s Law
It states that “pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is transmitted undiminished
to every portion of the fluid and the walls of the containing vessel”.
A well known application of Pascal’s law is the hydraulic lift used to support or lift
heavy objects. It is schematically illustrated in figure.
F1
CAR
A1 A2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 120
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
A piston with small cross section area A 1 exerts a force F1 on the surface of a
F1
liquid such as oil. The applied pressure P A is transmitted through the connecting
1
pipe to a larger piston of area A2. The applied pressure is the same in both cylinders,
so
F1 F2 A2
P or F2 .F1
A1 A 2 A1
Now, since A2 > A1, therefore, F2 > F1. Thus, hydraulic lift is a force multiplying
device with a multiplication factor equal to the ratio of the areas of the two
pistons. Dentist’s chairs, car lifts and jacks, many elevators and hydraulic brakes
all use this principle.
SIR JOSEPH JOHN THOMSON (1856 - 1940)
Cambridge University, Cambridge, Great Britain
“in recognition of the great merits of his theoretical and
experimental investigations on the conduction of
electricity by gases’’
FLUID MECHANICS WORKSHEET-1
1. 100 kg of iron and cotton are weighed by using a spring balance on the
surface of the earh.If R1 and R2 are the reading shown by the balance,then
1) R1 R2 2) R1 R2 3) R1 R2 4) R1 R2 0
2. An object of uniform density is allowed to float in water kept in a beaker. The
object has triangular cross-section as shown in the figure. If the water pressure
measured at the three point A,B and C below the object are P A, P B and P C
respectively then:
A B C
1) PA > PB > PC 2) PA > PB< PC 3) PA = PB= PC 4) PA = PC < PB
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 121
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
3. The pressure inside a liquid of density d at a depth ‘h’ below its
surface is
h d hg
1) d g 2) hdg 3) h g 4)
d
4. Pressure at any point inside a liquid is
1) directly proportional to density of the liquid
2) inversely proportional to density of the liquid
3) directly proportional to square root of density of the liquid
4) inversely proportional to square of density of liquid
5. Liquid pressure at a point in a liquid does not depend on
1) density of liquid 2) shape of the vessel in which the liquid is kept
3) depth of the point from the surface 4) acceleration due to gravity
6. As the depth of a liquid increases, the pressure of liquid
1) decreases 2) increases 3) remains same 4) cannot say
7. Pressure at a certain depth in river water is P 1, and at the same depth in sea
water is P2. Then [ here density of sea water is greater than that of river water)
1) P1 = P2 2) P1 > P2 3) P1 < P2 4) P1 - P2 = atmospheric pressure
8. Which device is used to measure atmospheric pressure?
1) Barometer 2) Hydraulic press
3) Manometer 4) Thermometer
9. 1 Bar = ____________ pa
1) 106 pa 2) 103pa 3) 105pa 4) 107pa
10. Units of Relative Density
1) m/s2 2) pa 3) kg/m3 4) no units
JEE MAIN AND ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. If density of kerosene in C.G.S is 0.8 gm/cm3 then density in S.I is
1) 800 kg/m3 2) 1000 kg/m3 3) 600 kg/m3 4) 1200kg/m3
g
2. Mass of stone is 900 gm dropped in a liquid and density of the stone is 3 .
cm3
Then volume of the stone is
1) 200 cm3 2) 300 cm3 3) 400 cm3 4) 100 cm3
3 3
3. Water of density 4kg/m and ice of density 2 kg/m are mixed together. If their
masses are equal then the density of mixture is
8 7 5 2
1) kg m–3 2) kg m–3 3) kg m–3 4) kg m–3
3 3 3 3
4. In the above problem, if their volumes are equal then the density of mixture is
1) 5 kg m–3 2) 3 kg m–3 3) 1 kg m–3 4) 7 kg m–3
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 122
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
kg kg
5. If two densities of two liquids are 2 3 and 3
, their volumes are 5 lit and 6 lit.
m m3
Find the mixed density of two liquids [hint:- 1 lit = 1kg]
11 13 28 12
1) kg m–3 2) kg m–3 3) kg m–3 4) kg m–3
28 28 11 28
kg
6. If two masses of liquids 1 kg and 3 kg and their densities are 2 each.
m3
Then density of mixture of two liquids is
1) 4 kg m–3 2) 3 kg m–3 3) 1 kg m–3 4) 2 kg m–3
7. If a force is 50 dyne acting on area of block is 10cm2.Then the pressure is on block
is
dyne dyne dyne dyne
1) 5 2 2) 4 2 3) 6 2 4) 7
cm cm cm cm2
8. The pressure at the bottom of a lake, due to water is 4.9x10 6 N/m2. What is the
depth of the lake?
1)500m 2)400m 3)300m 4)200m
Comprehension Type:
In the same liquid pressure will be same at points at the same level, which is shown
in figure
p0
1 p0
1 h1 2 2 h2
3 4
5 6
9. From the above figure the pressure of point 3 is equal to the pressure at point _____
1) 3 2) 4 3) 5 4) 6
10. In the above question the pressure at point 5 is same as that of the pressure at
point ____
1) 3 2) 4 3) 5 4) 6
11. Choose the correct one
1 2
1) 1h1 2h2 2) 3) 12 h1h2 4) 1 h1 2 h2
h1 h2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 123
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
Matrix Match Type:
12. Density of blood is 1025 kg/m3, g = 10m/s2 and density of mercury is 13.6 g/cm3
Column-I Column-II
a) 1 atm pressure is equal to 1) 1.01×105N/m2
b) 1 Bar is equal to 2) pressure due to 76 cm of mercury
column
c) Pressure due to 10.3 m water 3) pressure due to 760 mm of mercury
column column
d) Pressure due to 9.76 m blood 4) 1.01×106 dyne/cm2
column
5) pressure due to 0.76 m of mercury
column
13. Piston of cross -section area 100 cm2 is used in a hydraulic press
to exert a force of 107 dynes on the water. The cross-sectional area of the piston
which support an object having a mass 2000kg is (g=10m/s2)
1)100cm2 2)109 cm2 3)2x104 cm2 4)2x1010cm2
14. Two pistons of a hydraulic press have diam eters of 30 cm & 2.5cm . What is
the force exerted by a large piston,when 50kg weight is placed on the smaller
piston?
1)7200kg wt 2)7800kg wt 3)7000kg wt 4)8000kg wt
15. The force does water exert on the base of a house tank of base area 1.5 m2 when
it is filled with water up to a height of 1 m if (g = 10 m/s -2)
1) 1200 kgwt 2)1500 kgwt 3) 1700 kgwt 4) 2000 kgwt
Comprehension Type:
Two liquids of density 3 kg/m3 and 4 kg/m3 are mixed together then,
16. If their masses are equal then the density of mixture is ____________ kg/m 3
24 7 7 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
7 24 2 7
17. If their volumes are equal then the density of mixture is ____ kg/m 3
24 7 7 2
1) 2) 3) 4)
7 24 2 7
18. If the ratio of masses is 1 : 2 than the value of the density of mixture is ____ kg/
m3
5 18 9 5
1) 2) 3) 4)
18 5 5 9
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 124
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
Integer Answer Type:
19. The reading of a spring balance when a block is suspended from it in air is 60 N.
This reading is changed to 40 N when the block is submerged in water. The
specific gravity of block is ________
Multi Correct Choice Type:
20. Choose the correct statements from the following?
1) The pressure exerted by a liquid column at a point depends upon the height
of the liquid column above it.
2) The pressure exerted by a liquid column at a point depends upon the density
of the liquid.
3) The pressure exerted by a liquid column at a point does not depend upon the
shape of the vessel containing the liquid.
4) The pressure exerted by a liquid column at a point depends upon the shape
of the vessel containing the liquid.
21. Two syringes of different cross sections (without needles) filled with water are
connected with a tightly fitted rubber tube filled with water. Diameters of the
smaller piston and larger piston are 1.0cm and 3.0 cm respectively. If the smaller
piston is pushed in through 6.0 cm, how much does the larger piston move out
1) 0.18cm 2) 0.32cm 3) 0.67cm 4) 0.96cm
22. In a car lift compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small piston having a radius of
5cm. This pressure is transmitted to a second piston of radius 15cm. If the mass
of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg. What is F1?
1) 14.7 x103 N 2)1.47x103 N 3)2.47x103 N 4)24.7x103 N
23. In the above problem what is the pressure necessary to accomplish this task
(g=9.8m/s2)
1)1.87x105 N/m2 2)18.7x105 N/m2 3)2.87x105 N/m2 4)28.7x105 N/m2
24. Toricelli’s barometer used mercury. Pascal duplicated it using French wine of
density 984kg / m3 . The height of the wine column for normal atmospheric pressure
is
1) 9.5 m 2) 10 m 3) 10.5 m 4) 11m
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 125
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS SYNOPSIS-2
I. UPTHRUST or BUOYANT FORCE:
When a body is partly or wholly immersed in a fluid (liquid or gas), the fluid
exerts an upward force on the body
The upward force experienced by a body when partly or wholly immersed in
a fluid is called upthrust or buoyant force, whereas the phenomenon responsible
for this called buoyancy.
II. WHAT CAUSES UPTHRUST?
We learnt that
i) Liquids exert same pressure in all directions at a given depth.
ii) Magnitude of pressure exerted by a liquid increases with depth and is given by
the expression “ h . .g ”.
Where ‘h’ is the depth of liquid from the free surface, ‘ ’, the density and
‘g’, the acceleration due to gravity.
When a body (say a metal block) is completely immersed in a liquid, the
following kinds of pressure act on it.
a) Lateral Pressure acting on the sides of the block. This pressure mutually
cancels each other.
b) Pressure P1 acting downward, on the upper surface of the block which is lesser
in magnitude, because of lesser depth of liquid displaced.
c) Pressure P2, acting upward, on the lower surface of the block which is greater
in magnitude, because of greater depth of liquid displacd.
As P2 is greater than P1, therefore, there is a net pressure acting upward on
the lower surface of the block.
As, Force = Pressure x Area of cross-section, therefore, there is a net
upward force acting on the block. It is this force which is called upthrust or
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 126
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
buoyant force.
Mathematical Expression for upthrust:
Consider a metal block of height h’ and area of cross-section ‘a’, completely
immersed in a liquid of density ‘ ’ such that the depth of liquid from the upper
surface is h1, and from the lower surface is h2, as shown in the figure.
Downward pressure P1 on the upper surface
P1 h1 g
Upward pressure P2 on the lower surface
P2 h 2 g
As h2 > h1, therefore net pressure P in upward direction
P P2 P1 h 2 g h1 g h 2 h1 .g h . .g
h2 h1 h
Furthermore, as
Force = Pressure x Area
Upthrust h g a (or)
Upthrust V g ah volume of liquid displaced (or)
Upthrust mg V mass of liquid displaced
Upthrust = W {W = mg}
Thus, upthrust is defined as the weight of the fluid displacd by the immersed
part of the body.
I. ARCHIMEDE’S PRINCIPLE
If heavy object is immersed in water , it seems to weighless than when it is in
air. This is becauses the water exerts an upward force called buoyant force. It is
equal to the weight of the fluid displaced by the body.
“A body wholly or partially submerged in a fluid is buoyed up by a force equal to
the weight of the dispalced fluid”. This result is known as Archimede’s principle.
Thus, the magnitude of byoyant force (F) is given by,
F ViL g Here, Vi = immersed volume of solid
L = denisty of liquid and g = acceleration due to gravity
Proof:
Consider an arbirtarily shaped body of volume V placed in a container filled with
a fluid of density L . The body is shown completely immersed, but complete
immersion is not essential to the proof. To begin with, imagine the situation
before the body was immersed. The region now occupied by the body was filled
with fluid, whose weight was VL g . Because the fluid as a whole was in hydrostatic
equilibrium, the net upwards force (due to difference in pressure at different
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 127
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
depths) on the fluid in that region was equal to the weight of the fluid occuping
that region.
L
Now, consider what happens when the body has displaced the fluid. The
pressure at every point on the surface of the body is unchanged from the value at
the same location when the body was not present. This is because the pressure
at any point depends only on the depth of that point below the fluid surface.
Hence, the net force exerted by the surrounding fluid on the body is exactly the
same as that exerted on the region before the body was present. But we know
the latter to VL g , the weight of the displaced fluid. Hence, this must also be the
buoyant force exerted on the body. Archimede’s principle is thus, proved.
FLUID MECHANICS WORKSHEET-2
1. The force of buoyancy is equal to
1) Weight of the body
2) Weight of the liquid displaced by the body
3) Apparent weight of the body
4) None of these
2 When a body is full immersed in a liquid, the loss of weight of the body is equal to
1)Apparent weight of the body 2)force of buoyance
3)Half the force of buoyancy 4)Twice the force of buoyancy
3. A boat full of scrap iron is floating on water in a lake. If all the iron is dropped into
the water,the level of water will
1)go up 2)fall down
3)remain the same 4)Can not be decided
4. Consider the follwing two statements and identify the correct choice.
A)When a abody floats in a liquid, it displaces the liquid whose weight is equal to
its own weight.
B)When a body sinks in a liquid, it displaces the liquid whose volume is equal to
its own volume.
1)A is true but B is false. 2)A is false but B is true.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 128
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
3)Both A and B are true. 4)Both A and B are false.
5. A triangular element of the liquid is shown in the fig., Px, Py and Pz represent the
pressures on the element of the liquid. Then:
Pz Px
Py
2 2 2
1) Px Py Pz 2) Px Py Pz 3) Px Py Pz 4) Px Py Pz = constant
6. The force of buoyancy on an immersed body is
1) Due to weight of the body
2) Due to the pressure difference between upper surface and lower surface of
the body
3) Due to atmospheric pressure
4) both (1) and (2)
7. A solid is completely immersed in a liquid the force exerted by the liquid on the
solid will
1) Increase if it is pushed deeper inside the liquid
2) change of its orientation is changed
3) Decrease if it is taken partially out of the liquid
4) None of the above
8. Buoyant force depends upon
1) Density of solid body immersed in a liquid
2) Density of liquid in which the body is immersed
3) Depends upon both density of solid and liquid.
4) Independent on density of liquid
9. Buoyant force is also called as
1) upthrust 2) upward force
3) both (1) & (2) 4) None of these
JEE-MAIN AND ADVANCED
SINGLE CORRECT CHOICE TYPE:
1. A body weighs 250g in air and 235g when completely immersed in water. Then
upthrust is
1) 15 gf 2) 20 gf 3) 10 gf 4) 30 gf
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 129
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
2. A body weighs 230g in air and 190g when completely immersed in water. Then
apparent loss in weight is
1) 40 gf 2) 30 gf 3) 20 gf 4) 50 gf
3. An iron rod of volume 100 cm3 and density 7.8 x 103 kg/m3 is completely immersed
in water. Calculate the upthrust acting on it.
(Take g = 10m/s2, density of water 103 kg/m3)
1) 102 N 2) 10 N 3) 10-4m3 4) 1 N
Comprehension type (Q.No. 4 & 5 )
An object of area of cross section 10cm2 and length 20cm is totally immersed in
water (g=10m/s2) density of object = 1200kg/m3 density of water = 1000 kg/m3.
4. Find the upthrust acting on it
1) 2 N 2) 2.4 N 3) 6 N 4) 10 N
5. In above question; weight of object is
1)2N 2) 2.4N 3) 6 N 4) 10 N
6. A beaker containing water is placed on the platform of a spring balance. The
balance reads 1.5kg. A stone of mass 0.5 kg and density 10 4 kg/m3 is immersed in
water without touching the walls of beaker. What will be the balance reading
now?
1) 2kg 2) 2.5kg 3) 1 kg 4) 3 kg
Integer type:
7. A vessel contains oil (density 0.4 g/cm 3) over mercury (density 13.6 g/cm 3). A
homogeneous sphere floats with half its volume immersed in mercury and the
other half in oil. The density of material of the sphere in g/cm3 is _______.
(Q.No. 8-10) Comprehension type:
A cube of metal whose density is 8.2 g/cm3 and side 7cm is tied to a thread and
completely immersed in a liquid of density 1.2 g/cm3.
8. Calculate weight of the cube.
1) 2812.6 gf 2) 28.126 gf 3) 281.26 gf 4) 28126 gf
9. Calcualte upthrust of the cube
1) 411.6 gf 2) 620 gf 3) 120 gf 4) 680 gf
10. Calculate tension in the string.
1) 2401 gf 2) 648.126 gf 3) 161 gf 4) 500 gf
11. A tall measuring jar contains ethyl alcohol of density 0.8 gm/cm3. An iron ball is
dropped in to it and the level rises by 20 cm3. The buoyant force acting on the ball
is
1) 0.2N 2) 0.25 N 3) 0.16N 4) 1.6N
12. A sphere of volume ‘V’ is immersed in two immiscible liquids (mercury and water)
taken in a vessel. If half of the volume of the sphere is in mercury and the other
half of its volume is in the water. Find the relative density of the sphere.
3
( Hg 13.6g /cm and water 1g /cm 3 )
1) 7.3 g/cm3 2) 12 g/cm3 3) 15 g/cm3 4) 20 g/cm3
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 130
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
13. A boat having length 2m and width 1m is floating in a lake. When a man stands
on the boat, it is depressed by 3 cm. The mass of the man is
1) 50kg 2) 55kg 3) 60 kg 4) 70 kg
Statement Type:
14. Statement I : The apparent weight of a block of wood floating in water is zero.
Statement II : The value of g in water is zero.
1) Both Statement-I, and Statement-II are true.
2) Both Statement-I, and Statement-II are false.
3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
15. A block of ice of area ‘a’ and thickness 0.5m is floating in fresh water. In order to
just support a man of 100kg. Find the area ‘a’ (The specific gravity of ice is 0.917
and density of water is 1000 kg/m3)
1) 5m2 2) 2.41m2 3) 4 m2 4) 1.5 m2
Matrix Match Type
16. Match the column-I with column-II
The spring balance ‘A’ reads ‘a’ units in figure I and Balance ‘B’ reads ‘b’ units in
figure II.
Column - I Column - II
a) The reading in balance ‘A’ in figure-III 1) a + b
b) The reading in balance ‘B’ in figure-III 2) upthrust
c) The reading in balance ‘B’ in figure-IV 3) < a
d) The exact decrease in weight of the body is 4) a - Thrust force
5) b + Thrust force
MULTI CORRECT CHOICE TYPE:
17. A cylinder of area of cross section 4 cm2 and length 60 cm is totally immersed in
water (g = 10 m/s2) (density of solid = 1500 kg/m3, density of water = 1000 kg/m3)
choose correct statements.
1) weight of solid is 36 N
2) upthrust acting on the cylinder is 2.4 N
3) upthrust acting on the cylinder is 24 N
4) weight of the solid is 3.6 N
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 131
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
18. An ornament weighing 36 g in air, weighs only 34 g in water. Assuming that
some copper is mixed with gold to prepare the ornament. Find the amount of
copper in it (specific gravity of gold is 19.3 and that of copper is 8.9)
1) 1.4 g 2) 2.2 g 3) 3 g 4) 4.1 g
19. A necklace weighs 50 g in air, but it weighs 46 g in water. Assume that copper is
mixed with gold to prepare the necklace. Find now much copper is present in it.
(Specific gravity of gold is 20 and that of copper is 10)
1) 40g 2) 30g 3) 20g 4) 15g
20. An iron casting has a number of cavities in it. It weighs 6000N in air and 4000N in
water. Determine the total volume of all the cavities in the casting. The density of
iron (without cavities) is 8.0 g/cm3, water 1g /cm 3 )
1) 0.412 m3 2) 0.612 m3 3) 0.125 m3 4) 0.250 m3
**********
FLUID MECHANICS_WORKSHEET_1 KEY
1) 2 2) 3 3) 2 4) 1 5) 2 6) 2 7) 3 8) 1
9) 3 10) 4
JEE MAIN AND ADVANCED:
1) 1 2) 2 3) 1 4) 2 5) 3 6) 4 7) 1 8) 1
9) 2 10) 4 11) 1 12) a-1,2,3,4,5; b-1,2,3,4,5; c-1,2,3,4,5; d-1,2,3,4,5
13) 3 14) 1 15) 2 16) 1 17) 3 18) 2 19) 3 20) 1,2,3
21) 3 22) 2 23) 1 24) 3
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS
1. Density in SI = 0.8 x 1000 = 800 kg/m3
2. Density = mass/Volume; Volume = mass/density
21 2
3.
1 2
1 2
4.
2
m1 m2
5.
m1 m2
1 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 132
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
7. Pressure = Force/Area
8. P h g
F1 F2
13.
A1 A2
F1 F2
14.
A1 A2
15. F PA; P h g
21 2
16.
1 2
1 2
17.
2
m1 m2 3 3 18
18.
m1 m2 1 2 1 1 5
1 2 3 4 3 2
Weight of air 60
19. specificgravity
Loss of weight in water 60 40 =3
21. L1 A1 L2 A2
F1 F2
22.
A1 A2
F
23. P
A
24. P gh
FLUID MECHANICS WORKSHEET-2 KEY
1) 2 2) 2 3) 2 4) 3 5) 2 6) 2 7) 3
8) 2 9) 3
JEE MAINS AND ADVANCED:
1) 1 2) 1 3) 4 4) 1 5) 2 6) 1 7) 7 8) 1
9) 1 10)1 11) 3 12) 1 13) 3 14) 3 15) 2
16) a-3,4; b-5; c-1; d-2 17) 1,4 18) 2 19) 2 20) 3
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 133
CLASS IX-PHYSICS FLUID MECHANICS
HINTS & SOLUTIONS
1. weight in air - weight in water
= (250g - 235g) = 15 gf
2. weight in air - weight in water
= (230g - 190g) = 40 gf
3. F=Vxdxg
= 10-4 x 103 x 10 = 1 N
4. F v i l g
5. F v s g
V V
7. Vdg dHg g doil g
2 2
8. Volume of the cube = 7 x 7 x 7 = 343 cm3
mass of the cube = volume x density = 343 x 8.2 = 2812.6 g
weight = 2812.6 gf
9. upthrust = V x d x g = 344 x 1.2 x g= 411.6 gf
10. Tension in the string =2812.6 – 411.6 = 2401 gf
11. Mg Vdg
V V
12. Vdg 13.6 g 1 g
2 2
13. Mg Vdg
15. m1=100kg; m2=0.917 x 1000 = 917; 1000kg /m 3 ; h = 0.5m;
100g + 917vg = v g v 1000 g
100 100 100
v g Ah A 2.41
83 83 83 0.5
17. weight = mg = A × l × s g = 4 × 10–4 × 60 × 10–2 × 1500 × 10
= 3600 × 103 × 10–6 = 3.6 N
Upthrust = 4 × 10–4 × 60 × 10–2 × 1000 × 10 = 2.4 N
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 134
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
MEMO GRAPH
WORK, POWER AND ENERGY
Work Power
Positive Negative Zero
work work work
Mechanical Light Heat Electric Magnetic Sound
energy energy energy energy energy energy
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 135
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
WORK, POWER & ENERGY
SYNOPSIS-1
Definition: Work is said to be done when a force produces motion.
Examples: A man climbing the stairs of a house is also doing work in moving himself
against the force of gravity.
Mathematical Expression for work :
work = Force × Distance moved in the direction of force
The work done by a force on a body depends on two factors.
i) Magnitude of the force.
ii) Distance through which the body moves (in the direction of force)
Units of work: The unit of work in C.G.S. system is ‘erg’.
W = F . S = 1dyne × 1cm = 1erg
erg : Work done is said to be one ‘erg’ if a force of one dyne displaces the body through
a distance of 1 cm along the direction of force.
1 erg = 1 dyne × 1 cm = 1 g cm s –2 × cm or 1 erg = 1 g cm2 s–2
The unit of work in S.I. system is joule (J)
W = F . S = 1N × 1m = 1 joule
Joule : Work is said to be one joule, if a force 1 newton displaces a body through a
distance of 1 m along the direction of force.
m
1 J = 1 N × 1 m = 1 kg. . m 1 J = 1 kg m2 s–2
s2
Relation between Joule and erg :
1 J = 1 N × 1 m = 105 dyn × 100 cm
= 10 7 dyn cm or 1 J = 10 7 erg.
Work done can be positive, negative or zero depending upon the directrion of force
and direction of motion. (displacement)
Work done by a force on a body (or an object) is said to be positive work done when
the body is displaced in the direction of applied force.
Types of work done:
Positive work done :Work done by a force on a body (or an object) is said to be positive
work done when the body is displaced in the direction of applied force.
Examples : i) The body falling freely under the action of gravity has positive work
done by the gravitational force.
ii) The work done by the engine is positive.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 136
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
Negative work done :The work done by a force on a body is said to be negative work done
when the body is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of the force.
Examples :
i) When an object is lifted upward to a certain height, then the work done by the
force of gravity (equal to the weight of the object) on the object is negative.
ii) Work done by frictional force as force of friction and the displacement are
opposite to each other.
iii) Work done by a person with a suitcase on his head moving upwards in the
vertical direction. Here the displacement is in the upward direction and the force
of gravity acts in the downward direction.
iv) When brakes are applied on a moving vehicle, work done by the braking force
is negative.
Zero work :
If S = 0 i.e., the body does not move from its position on the application of force, then
W = 0. Thus, no work is done by the force if it fails to displace the body.
Ex : When a person pushes a wall but fails to move the wall, then work done by the
forceon the wall is zero.
b) When a body moves in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the force
no work is done by the force.
Examples :
i) When a person carrying a suitcase in his hand or on his head is walking
horizontally, the work done against gravity is zero.
ii) No work is done on a body when it moves along a circular path.
iii) Work done by the flying aeroplane is zero as the force and displacement are
perpendicular to each other.
Work done against gravity : If a body is lifted vertically upwards, then the force
required to lift the body is equal to it weight. So, whenever work is done against
gravity, the amount of work done is equal to the product of weight of the body and
the vertical distance through which the body is lifted.
F
h
F
mg
ground
Work done by against gravity
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 137
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
Suppose a body of mass ‘m’ is lifted vertically upwards through a distance ‘h’. In this
case the force required to lift the body will be equal to weight of the body (m × g).
Work done in lifting a body = weight of body × vertical distance
W = mg × h
Where, m = mass of body
g = acceleration due to gravity at that place
h = height through which the body is lifted
ACTIVITY :- Lift an object up. Work is done by the force exerted by you on the
obejct. The obejct moves upwards. The force you exerted is in the direction of
displacement. However, there is the force of gravity acting on the object.
Which one of these forces is doing positive work ?
Which one is doing negative work ?
WORKSHEET-1
1. A bucket full of water is drawn up by a person. In this case the work
done by the gravitational force is
1) negative because the force and displacement are in opposite directions
2) positive because the force and displacement are in the same direction
3) negative because the force and displacement are in the same direction
4) positive because the force and displacement are in opposite directions
2. When brakes are applied on a moving vehicle , work done by the breaking force is
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero 4) Infinity
3. A body when it moves along a circular path, the work done on the body is
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero 4) Infinity
4. The work done by the engine is ________
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero 4) Infinity
5. Work done when the body is displaced in the direction of applied force is __________
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero 4) Infinity
6. The work is done by the force if it fails to displace the body is
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero 4) Infinity
7. Work done when the body is displaced in the opposite direction of applied force is
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero 4) Infinity
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 138
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
8. A ball is thrown vertically upwards from the ground. Regarding the work done by
air resistance which of the following is correct?
1) work done is positive during the ascent and negative during the descent
2) work done is positive during the ascent and positive during the descent
3) work done is negative during the ascent and positive during the descent
4) work done is negative during the ascent and negative during the descent
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. An agent is moving a positively charged body towards another fixed positive
charge. The work done by the agent is
1) positive 2) negative 3) zero 4) may be positive or negative
2. A man weighing 80 kg climbs a staircase carrying a 20 kg load. The staircase has
40 steps each of 25 cm height. If he takes 20 seconds to climb, the work done is
1) 9800 J 2) 490 J 3) 98 x 105 J 4) 7840 J
3. Work is said to be done
1) When no force is applied 2) When a force produces no motion.
3) When a force produces motion. 4) None of these
4. Mathematical Expression for work is
1) Force × Distance moved in the direction of applied force
Force
2)
Dis tan ce moved in the direction of force
Dis tan ce in the dirction of force
3) 4) None of these
Force
5. Unit of work is
1) Joule 2) erg 3) newton 4)Both (1) & (2)
6. Nature of work done by gravitational force
a) may be negative b) may be positive c) may be zero d) always positive
1) a,b & d are correct 2) a, b & c are correct
3) a,c & d are correct 4) all correct
7. A rain drop of mass (1/10) gram falls vertically at constant speed under the
influence of the forces of gravity and viscous drag. In falling through 100 m, the
work done by gravity is
1) 0.98 J 2) 0.098 J 3) 9.8 J 4) 98 J
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 139
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
8. When displacement is perpendicular to the force, work done is
1) Positive 2) Negative 3) Zero 4) May be positive or negative
9. A weight of 5 N is moved up a frictionless inclined plane from R to Q
as shown. What is the work done in joules?
1) 15 2) 20 3) 25 4) 35
10. Work done by the gravitational force on a body of mass “m” moving on a smooth
horizontal surface through a distance ‘s’ is
1) mgs 2) –mgs 3) 0 4) 2 mgs
11. Calculate the work done by a passenger standing on a platform holding a suitcase
of 10 kgwt
1) 15 2) 10 3) 0 4) 5
JEE ADVANCED
Multi Correct Choice Type:
12. The work done by a force on a body depends on two factors
1) Magnitude of the force. 2) External dimensions of the body
3) Distance through which the body moves 4) Colour of the body
13. Choose the correct statements :
1)When displacement is opposite to the force work done = - (force × displacement)
2)When displacement is opposite to the force work done = + (force × displacement)
3)Work done by frictional force is negative
4)Work done by frictional force is positive
Statement Type
14. Statement I : Work done is said to be one erg if a force of one dyne displaces the
body through a distance of 1 cm along the direction of force.
Statement II : Work is said to be one joule, if a force 1 newton displaces a body
through a distance of 1 m along the direction of force.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement
I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement
I. 3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Comprehension Type:
Work done can be positive, negative or zero depending upon the directrion of
force and direction of motion
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 140
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
15. Work done by a force on a body is said to be positive work done when
1) No force is applied
2) The body is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of the force.
3) The body is displaced in the direction of applied force
4) Both (1) & (2)
16. The work done by a force on a body is said to be negative work done when
1) No force is applied
2) The body is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of the force.
3) The body is displaced in the direction of applied force
4) The body does not move from its position on the application of force
17. The work done by a force on a body is said to be zero when
1) No force is applied
2) The body is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of the force.
3) The body is displaced in the direction of applied force
4) The body does not move from its position on the application of force
Matrix Match Type:
18. Column - I Column - II
a) 1Joule 1) 107 erg.
b) 1erg 2) 1 kg m2 s–2
c) Work done in lifting a body 3) Positive work done
d) Body falling freely under 4) Weight of body × vertical distance
the action of gravity 5) 1 g cm2 s–2
Integer Answer Type:
19. A boy pushes a book by applying a force 5N, the work done by this force in displacing
the book through 20 cm along the direction of the push is ______J
Multi Correct Choice Type:
20. Choose the correct statements :
1) When a stone tied to a string is whirled in a circle, the work done on it by the
string is zero
2) When brakes are applied on a moving vehicle, work done by the braking force is
negative.
3) Work done by the flying aeroplane is zero as the force and displacement are
perpendicular to each other.
4) The body falling freely under the action of gravity has positive work done by the
gravitational force.
Matrix Match Type:
21. Column - I Column - II
a) One kilo joule 1) 10 6 joules
b) One mega joule 2)10 3 joules
c) One giga joule 3)10 9 joules
d) 1 erg 4)1 dyne - cm
5)10 -7 joules
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 141
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
SYNOPSIS-2
Introduction to Energy
It is often said that a person A is more energetic than a person B. The meaning of
this statement is that a person A can do more work than the person B. Similarly,
a person after doing a lot of work gets tired and after that he is not able to do
much work. It is clear that a person doing work expends something. This ‘something’
is known as the energy of the person. The energy spent by a person is equal to
the work done by him. Human beings and animals get energy by eating food.
It may be noted that anything which is capable of doing work has energy. For
example, the steam pushes up the lid placed on the boiling water container. It
means, the steam has the ability or capacity to do work. The work done by the
steam on the lid is equal to the energy of the steam.
Definition of energy
If a person can do a lot of work we say that he has a lot of energy or he is very
energetic. In physics also, anything which is able to do work is said to possess
energy.
Thus, energy is the ability to do work or the capacity to do work.
Units of energy
Unit of energy is same as that of the unit of work as work is a form of energy.
So, S.I. unit of energy is Joule (J).
When we say that energy of a body is 1 joule, it means, this body has the capacity to do
1 J work.
Commercial unit of Energy
The commercial unit (or trade unit) of energy is kilowatt-hour which is written in
short form as kWh. Kilowatt-hour is usually used as a commercial unit of electrical
energy.
One kilowatt-hour is the amount of electrical energy consumed when an electrical
appliance having a power rating of 1 kilowatt is used for 1 hour. Since a kilowatt
means 1000 watts, so we can also say that one kilowatt-hour is the amount of
electrical energy consumed when an electrical appliance of 1000 watts is used
for 1 hour.
1 kilowatt-hour is the amount of energy consumed at the rate of 1 kilowatt for 1
hour. That is, 1 kilowatt-hour = 1 kilowatt for 1 hour
or 1 kilowatt-hour =1000 watts for 1 hour
Note:Watt or kilowatt is the unit of electrical power but kilowatt-hour is the unit of
electrical energy.
Energy is a scalar quantity.
Dimensional formula of energy = ML2 T 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 142
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
Kinds of Energy
In actual practice there are many kinds of energy, such as mechanical energy;
heat energy; light energy; sound energy, electrical energy; nuclear energy;
chemical energy, etc. Let us discuss about mechanical energy.
Mechanical energy (M.E)
The sum of kinetic energy (K.E) and potential energy (P.E) of a body is known
as mechanical energy. M.E = K.E + P.E
Kinetic energy:- Energy possessed by a body by virtue of it’s motion is called
kinetic energy
Ex: (1) Moving vehicle
Energy has many forms, such as thermal energy (Heat Energy), sound Energy,
Light Energy.
Expression for Kinetic energy :-
1
The kinetic energy of a body of mass ‘m’ moving with a speed v is m v2
2
Potential Energy:- Energy possessed by a body (or) system by virtue of its position.
Ex:-(1) Water stored at a height, (2) compressed spring
Gravitational potential energy :-
The Potential energy due to height above the earth’s surface is called gravitational
potential energy.
In general, if the potential energy at the ground is taken as zero, the potential
energy of an object at a height h above the ground is given by
U = mgh
The energy results from the force of attraction mg between the earth and the
object.From newton’s third law, both earth and the object attract each other.
Hence, strictly speaking energy ‘mgh’ is not the potential energy of the object
alone it is the potential energy of object-earth system.
Heat Energy:- Heat is the energy that is transferred between a system and its
environment because of a temperature difference that exists between them.
Heat is an Internal energy that consists of the kinetic and potential energies
associated with the random motion of the atoms, molecules and other micro
scopic bodies within object.
Sound Energy: Sound is a form of energy, that is produced by a body when it is in the
state of vibration. It propagates in the form of Longitudinal waves through elastic
media and causes sensation of hearing.
Light Energy:-
Light is a form of energy, which causes sensation of vision.
Light travels from one place to another place in the form of Electromagnetic
waves.
E.M wave can transport energy and deliver it to a body on which it falls.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 143
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
Elastic potential energy :-
When a spring is streched or compressed from its natural length, it get extra
energy. It can return to its natural length by performing some work.
The extra energy stored in a streched or compressed spring is called elastic
potential energy.
A streched rubber band also has potential energy, where as rubber band at its
natural length lying on a table has no elastic potential energy.
Other forms of energy :-
Besides mechanical energy, energy can exist in several other forms.
Charged particles and electric currents can produce electrical energy and
magnetic energy.Electric batteries,cooking gas,petrol etc., have chemical energy
stored in them.Even matter itself is a concentrated form of energy and can be
converted into other forms of energy such as kinetic energy and heat energy.
Electrical energy :Energy is associated with electric current is called electrical
energy
The flow of electrical current causes bulbs to glow, fans to rotate and bells to
ring.
Work and energy : Whenever work is done on an object, it’s energy increases.
When we push a block kept on a table, the block starts moving. We do work on the
block and the block aquires kinetic energy.
ACTIVITY :-
• Take a rubber band.
• Hold it at one end and pull from the other. The band stretches.
• Release the band at one of the ends.
• What happens ?
• The band will tend to regain its original length. Obviously the band had
acquired energy in its stretched position.
• How did it acquire energy when stretched?
WORKSHEET-2
1. The total amount of work done on a body is equal to 24J, then change
in its energy.
1) zero 2) 24 J 3) 42 J 4) Infinity
2. In the construction of electric bells , relays , electric motors and electric generators
__________ energy is used
1) Sound 2) Light 3) Heat 4) Magnetic
3. Whenever work is done on an object, its energy is
1) zero 2) increases 3) decreases 4) infinity
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 144
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
4. Energy is associated with electric current is called ________ energy
1) Sound 2) Magnetic 3) Electrical 4) Light
5. The phenomenon of transformation of the energy, from the useful form to the
useless form is known as
1) Conservation of energy 2) Dissipation of power
3) Dissipation 4) Dissipation of energy
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. The S.I unit of energy is
1) joule 2) erg 3) watt 4) newton
2. The Dimensional formula for energy is
1) MLT 2 2) ML1T 2 3) ML2 T 2 4) M1L3 T 2
3. The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its position (or) configuration is
called 1) Heat energy 2) P.E 3) K.E 4) Light
energy
4. The work done is always
1) Greater than energy spent
2) Less than energy spent
3) Some times greater than & sometimes less than energy
4) Equal to energy spent
5. As a body rolls down a inclined plane, it has
1) Only kinetic energy
2) Only potential energy
3) Both kinetic energy and potential energy
4) Neither kinetic energy nor potential energy
JEE ADVANCED
Multi Correct Choice Type:
6. Choose the correct statements :
1) Unit of energy is same as that of the unit of work.
2) Capacity to do work is known as energy.
3) The commercial unit of energy is kilowatt-hour.
4) When we say that energy of a body is 1 joule, it means, this body has the capacity to
do 1 J work.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 145
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
Reasoning Type:
7. Statement I :Kinetic energy of the body is due to virtue of its motion
Statement II :Potential energy of the body is due to virtue of its position
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement
I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement
I. 3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Comprehension Type:
The sum of kinetic energy (K.E) and potential energy (P.E) of a body is known
as mechanical energy
8. Gravitational potential energy (U) of the body is given by
1 1
1) mgh 2) m v2 3) mv 4) mgh2
2 2
9. The kinetic energy of a body depends
1) On its mass only 2) On its speed only
3) On its mass as well as on its speed 4) Neither on its mass nor on its speed
10. The mechanical energy is the sum of
1) P.E & K.E 2) Thermal energy & light energy
3) sound energy & nuclear energy 4) K.E & heat energy
Matrix Match Type:
11. Column - I Column - II
a) Water stored at a height 1) Sound energy
b) Moving vehicle 2) Kinetic energy
c) Forms of energy 3) Potential energy
d) Dimensional formula of energy 4) ML2 T 2
5) Light energy
Integer Answer Type:
12. The kinetic energy of a ball of mass 200 g moving at a speed of 20 cm/s is
___________× 10 4erg
Multi Correct Choice Type:
13. Choose the correct statements :
1) When the body is at rest its kinetic energy is zero
2) When the body is on the ground(h=0) its potential energy is zero
3) Compressed spring posses potential energy
4) The potential energy of an object due to its height above the earth’s surface is
zero
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 146
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
14. Choose the correct statements :
1) 1 kilowatt-hour is the amount of energy consumed at the rate of 1 kilowatt for 1
hour
2) Work done by external forces on the system is equal to the increase in the
system’s energy
3) Work done by external forces on the system is equal to the decrease in the
system’s energy
4) 1 kilowatt-hour is the amount of energy consumed at the rate of 1 kilowatt for 2
hours
SYNOPSIS - 3
Law of conservation of energy : According to this law “Energy can neither be
created nor be destroyed, but can be changed from one form to another form”.
Examples:
1) When a body falls from a certain height, its P.E gradually changes into kinetic
energy but the total sum of both the energies remains the same.
2) When coal is burnt in a steam engine, the chemical energy of coal disappears
and an equivalent amount of heat and light energies are obtained.
The law of conservation of energy of freely falling body :
The total energy of a freely falling body at any instant is constant.
A PE=mgh
KE=zero
h B PE=mg(h-x)
KE=mgx
h-x
PE=zero
C
KE=mgh
Consider a body of mass ‘m’ at a height ‘h’ above the ground. Suppose this position
of the body is A. Suppose the body at ‘A’ is at rest i.e v = 0.
At the position ‘A’ :
Potential energy at ‘A’, P.E = mgh
1 1 2
kinetic energy at ‘A’, K.E = mv2 = m 0 0
2 2
Total energy of the body at A = P.E + K.E = mgh + 0 = mgh -------------- (1)
Let the body falls freely under the action of gravity to position ‘B’ through a height
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 147
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
x. Now, the height of the body from the ground = h – x
At position ‘B’
Potential energy of the body at ‘B’ , P.E = mg (h – x) = mgh – mgx
1
kinetic energy of the body at ‘B’ , K.E. mv 2 ------------ (a)
2
where v is the velocity of the body at position ‘B’.
But here a = g and s = x, u = 0 as body at A is at rest
using v2 – u2 = 2as v2 = 2as v2 = 2gx ------------- (b)
1
from equation (a) and (b) we have K.E = m 2gx mgx
2
Now, total energy at the point ‘B’ = P.E + K.E = mgh – mgx + mgx = mgh ------ (2)
Finally, let the body touches the ground at ‘C’, so that the distance through which
it falls = h
At position ‘C’
Potential energy at ‘C’, P.E = mg (0) = 0
1
Kinetic energy at ‘C’, K.E = mv2 ------------------ (c)
2
where v is the velocity of the body just at position ‘C’.
Here u = 0 [ body is at rest at position A, a = g and s = h]
we know that v – u2 = 2as v2 – 0 = 2gh v2 = 2gh ------------------- (d)
2
1
from equation ‘c’ and ‘d’ we have K.E = m 2gh = mgh
2
Total energy at the point ‘C’ = P.E + K.E = 0 + mgh = mgh ------------------- (3)
From (1), (2) and (3) it is clear that the total energy of a body at any instant during
free fall of a body remains constant. Hence, the law of conservation of energy is
verified.
Note : 1) The total energy (K.E + P.E) of the freely falling body is converted into sound
and heat energy, when the body strikes the ground.
2) For a freely falling body, potential energy changes into kinetic energy.
3) For a body projected vertically upwards, kinetic energy changes into potential
energy.
Conservation of mechanical energy for a vertically porjected body
Statement : The total energy in the universe is constant and it can be neither created
nor destroyed.
Consider a body of mass “m” it is projected vertically upwards with an initial
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 148
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
velocity “u”
m A
h C
u x
m B
At Point B :-
The point is on the ground so h = 0
Potential energy P.E. = mgh = mg(0) = 0, Initial velocity = u
1 1 1
Kinetic energy KE = m v2 = mu2 Total energy = PE + KE = mu2
2 2 2
1
EB mu2
2
At point A :
This point is at a height “h” from the ground. At this point velocity is zero v = 0.
1 1 2
KE m v2 m 0 0
2 2
PE = mgh, Initial velocity = u, acceleration a = -g, distance travelled s = h
From v2 - u2 = 2as.
u2
2 2 2
We will get 0 - u =2 ( -g ) h -u = -2gh h
2g
u2 1
PE = mgh = mg 2g 2 mu
1 1
Total Energy = PE + KE mu2 0 EA mu2
2 2
At point C :
This point is at a height “x” from the ground and let the velocity of the body at
this point be “v”. h=x
Potential energy PE = mgh = mgx
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 149
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
1
KE mv2
2
initial velocity = u, acceleration a = -g, displacement s = x
from v2 - u2 = 2as , we will get
v 2 u2 u2 v 2
v2 u2 2 g x x
2g 2g
u2 v 2 1 2 1 2
PE mg mu mv
2g 2 2
1 1 1
total energy PE KE mu2 mv 2 mv2
2 2 2
1
Ec mu2 ; At A.B and C the total energy is constant.
2
Law of conservation of Energy: The sum of total energy in a system is a constant
quantity. It can neither be created nor destroyed. However, energy can change
from one form to another form.
Law of conservation of energy in case of a simple pendulum :
P.E=mgh C B P.E=mgh
K.E=0 h A h K.E=0
P.E=0
K.E=mgh
Motion of simple pendulum
Let us consider a simple pendulum suspended from a rigid support ‘O’. Its resting
position is ‘A’. When it is displaced to one side and then released, it swings from
one side to the other, reaching equal distance and equal height on either side.
Neglecting the friction between the bob and the surrounding air (i.e., considering
the pendulum as an isolated system), the motion of the pendulum can be easily
explained by applying the law of conservation of energy as follows :
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 150
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
(1) As the bob of the pendulum swings from A to B, the kinetic energy changes into
potential energy and at B (extreme position), its total mechanical energy is the
potential energy (no kinetic energy) and so it comes to rest momentarily in this
position.
(2) As it swings back from B to A, the potential energy decreases and the kinetic
energy increases. At A (resting position), it has the total mechanical energy in the
form of kinetic energy and the potential energy is zero.
(3) Again, when it swings from A to C, the kinetic energy decreases and the potential
energy increases. The potential energy becomes maximum at C (the other extreme
position).
(4) From C to A, the potential energy again changes into kinetic energy. At an
intermediate position (between A and B or between A and C), it has both the kinetic
energy and potential energy, but the sum of both the energies (i.e., the total
mechanical energy) remains constant throughout the swing.
Proof :
Let ‘m’ be the mass of the bob of a simple pendulum.
Let it is displaced from A to B so that its height from the mean position is ‘h’.
The P.E of the bob at height ‘h’ = mgh ---------------- (1)
When the bob reaches back the mean position with velocity ‘v’, then K.E of the bob
1
at mean position (A) = mv2 ------------------- (2)
2
Now using, v2 – u2 = 2as,
we get, v2 – 0 2 = 2gh [ u = 0 and s = h]
Therefore the above equation can be written as v 2 = 2gh ---------------- [3]
using (3) in (2) we have
1
K.E m 2gh mgh
2
Thus P.E of the bob of a simple pendulum when raised to height h is equal to the
kinetic energy of the bob of pendulum at its mean position. This is the law of
conservation of energy.
Transformation of energy: Energy changes happen all around us. The change of
energy from one form to another form is called the transformation of energy.
INTER-CONVERSION OF ENERGY:
Inter-conversion of Mechanical Energy:
1) When an electric drill is used to bore a hole in a wooden block, smoke starts
rising. It is because mechanical energy of drill changes into heat energy.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 151
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
2) When two stones are struck against each other sharply, sparks of light are
produced along with sound. Thus, mechanical energy changes into light and
sound energies.
3) When the water stored in dams is allowed to flow from a pipe and directed
against turbine, the mechanical energy of the flowing water rotates the turbine.
The turbine is coupled to electric generator, where the mechanical energy of the
turbine changes into electric energy.
Inter-conversion of Heat Energy:
1) In steam engines or diesel engines, the heat energy is converted into
mechanical energy.
2) In the preparation of certain chemical compounds, the heat energy changes
into chemical energy.
Inter-conversion of Light Energy:
1) During photosynthesis, the light energy changes into chemical energy. The
plants take the carbon dioxide gas and water and these react with the help of
chlorophyll and sunlight to form starch and oxygen.
2) When light energy falls on silver salts coated on photographic plate, it changes
into chemical energy.
3) When light energy is absorbed by photo-voltaic cells, it changes into electric
energy.Phot-voltaic cells are commonly used in electronic calculators; wrist
watches photographic cameras etc.
Inter-conversion of Sound Energy:
When we speak infront of a microphone, the sound energy changes into electric
energy.
Inter-conversion of Magnetic Energy:
When an electric generator works, the mechanical energy interacts with magnetic
energy and changes into electric energy.
Inter-conversion of Electric Energy:
1) In electric motors; fans; grinders; etc. the electric energy changes into
mechanical energy
2) In electric kettles and electric room heaters, the electric energy changes
into heat energy.
3) In electric bulbs, tube lights, etc, the electric energy first changes into heat
energy and then light energy.
4) In electromagnets, the electric energy changes into magnetic energy.
5) During the electrolysis of salt solutions the electric energy changes into
chemical energy.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 152
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
Inter-conversion of Chemical Energy:
1) During the process of burning, the chemical energy changes into heat energy
and light energy. When wood is burnt, the chemical energy changes into heat
and light energies.
2) In electric dry cells or car batteries, the chemical energy changes into
electri energy.
3) In explosive devices, such as fire crackers, bombs, etc. the chemical energy
changes into heat, light and sound energies.
A few more examples of changes of energy are given blow:
DEVICE ENERGY CHANGE
Electric fan Electrical energy into mechanical
energy
Car batteries Chemical energy into electrical energy
Cycle dynamo Mechanical energy into electrical
energy
Microphone Sound energy into electrical energy
Loudspeaker Electrical energy into sound energy
Solar cell Light energy into electrical energy
Electric torch Chemical energy into electrical energy
and then into light energy
Electric motor Electrical energy to mechanical
energy
WORKSHEET-3
1. The potential energy of a body at height ‘h’ is ‘ x ’ Joules, when it
reaches to the ground its potential energy will become
x
1) x Joules 2) Zero 3) 2 x Joules 4) Joules
2
2. If the kinetic energy of a body , when it is moving with a velocity ‘v’ is P Joules. If
it comes to rest then its kinetic energy is
1) Zero 2) P Joules 3) P2 Joules 4) 2P Joules
3. In case of simple pendulum change in kinetic energy is equal to
1) Zero 2) Change in potential energy
3) Potential energy 4) Total energy
4. In the preparation of certain chemical compounds , the __________ energy changes
into chemical energy
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 153
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
1) Light 2) Heat 3) Sound 4) Electrical
5. During the electrolysis of salt solutions , the electric energy changes into _________
energy
1) Light 2) Heat 3) Sound 4) Chemical
JEE MAINS
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. The potential energy of a freely falling object decreases continuously. What
happens to the loss of potential energy ?
1) It is continuously converted into sound energy
2) It is continuously converted into kinetic energy
3) It is continuously converted into magnetic energy 4) none of these
2. The potential energy of a body at a height h is mgh. When it falls to the ground,
its K.E becomes
1) 2mgh 2) mgh/2 3) mgh 4) mgh2
3. A body is dropped from point A as shown in the figure. When it comes to point B,
it has
1) only K.E. 2) only P.E 3) both K.E and P.E 4) none of these
4. A ball is thrown upwards from a point ‘A’. It reaches up to the highest
point ‘B’ and returns then
1) K.E at ‘A’ = K.E at ‘B’ 2) P.E at ‘A’ = P.E at ‘B’
3) P.E at ‘A’ = 2×K.E at ‘B’ 4) P.E at ‘B’ = K.E at ‘A’
5. A stone of mass ‘m’ is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity v. The
K.E at the highest point is
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 154
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
1 1 2
1) mv2 2) zero 3) 2 mv 4) 2 mgh
2 2
JEE ADVANCED
Multi Correct Choice Type:
6. When a body falls from a certain height
1) Its P.E gradually changes into kinetic energy
2) The total sum of both the energies (K.E & P.E) remains the same
3) Its kinetic energy gradually changes into P.E
4) The total sum of both the energies (K.E & P.E) does not remains same
Reasoning Type:
7. Statement I : When an electric drill is used to bore a hole in a wooden block,
smoke starts rising.
Statement II : Mechanical energy converts into heat energy.
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement
I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement
I. 3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Comprehension Type:
Energy can neither be created nor be destroyed, but can be changed from one
form to another form
8. In steam engines or diesel engines
1) Chemical energy changes into electrical energy.
2) Light energy changes into chemical energy
3) Mechanical energy interacts with magnetic energy and changes into electric energy
4) Heat energy is converted into mechanical energy
9. During photosynthesis
1) Electric energy changes into chemical energy
2) Heat energy is converted into mechanical energy
3) Light energy changes into chemical energy
4) Chemical energy changes into electric energy.
10. When an electric generator works
1) Chemical energy changes into electri energy.
2) Light energy changes into chemical energy
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 155
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
3) Mechanical energy interacts with magnetic energy and changes into electric
energy
4) Heat energy is converted into mechanical energy
Matrix Match Type:
11. Column - I Column - II
a) Electron revolves in a orbit 1) No energy
b) Bended bow 2) Kinetic energy
c) In explosive devices Inter conversion 3) Potential energy
of chemical energy changes to
d) Freely suspended mass less spring 4) Heat energy
5) Sound energy
Integer Answer Type:
12. A body is moving horizontally at a height of 10m has its P.E equal to K.E. Then
velocity of that body is (g = 9.8 m/s2)___________m/s
Reasoning Type:
13. Statement I : P.E of the bob of a simple pendulum when raised to height h is equal
to the kinetic energy of the bob of pendulum at its mean position
Statement II : The sum total of energy in a system is a constant quantity
1) Both Statements are true, Statement II is the correct explanation of Statement
I.
2) Both Statements are true, Statement II is not correct explanation of Statement
I. 3) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
4) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
Multi Correct Choice Type:
14. Choose the correct statements :
1) In case of freely falling body and body projected vertically up mechanical
energy remains constant
2) When a body is released from some height on falling through certain distance
P.E lost by it is equal to K.E gained by it
3) When a body is projected vertically up on reaching certain height K.E lost
by it is equal to P.E gained by it
4) When wood is burnt, the chemical energy changes into heat and light
energies.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 156
CLASS IX-PHYSICS WORK, POWER & ENERGY
WORK, POWER AND ENERGY
WPE -WORKSHEET-1 -KEY
CUQ: 1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 1 5) 1 6) 3 7) 2 8) 4
JEE ADVANCED :
1) 2 2) 1 3) 3 4) 1 5) 4 6) 2 7) 2 8) 3
9) 1 10) 3 11) 3 12) 1,3
13) 1,3 14) 2 15) 3 16) 2 17) 4 18) a-1,2; b-5; c-4 ; d-3
19) 1 20) 1,2,3,4 21) a-2;b-1;c-3;d-4,5
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS:
2. M man = 80kg, M Load = 20kg, Time = 20sec, g = 9.8m/s2
(80 + 20) × 9.8 × 40 × 0.25 = 9800J
9. 3m
Vertical height QP = 3m; W = F × S = 5 × 3 = 15N
19. work done = Force × displacement = 5 N × 0.2 m = 1 J
WPE -WORKSHEET-2 -KEY
MCQ: 1) 2 2) 4 3) 2 4) 3 5) 4
JEE ADVANCED :
1) 1 2) 3 3) 2 4) 4 5) 3 6) 1,2,3,4
7) 2 8) 1 9) 3 10) 1 11) a-3;b-2;c-1,2,3,5;d-4 12) 4
13) 1,2,3,4 14) 1,2
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS:
1 2 1
12. 200g 20 = 200 400 = 100 × 400 = 40,000 = 4 × 104 erg
2 2
WPE -WORKSHEET-3 -KEY
CUQ: 1) 2 2) 1 3) 2 4) 2 5) 4
JEE ADVANCED : 1) 2 2) 3 3) 3 4) 4 5) 2
6) 1,2 7) 2 8) 1 9) 3 10) 3 11) a-2,3;b-3;c-4,5;d-1
12) 14 13) 1 14) 1,2,3,4
HINTS AND SOLUTIONS:
1
12. mV 2 m g h ; V 2 2gh V 2gh v 2 9.8 10 14
2
************
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 157
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS
CONTENTS
Refraction of light at Plane surface
Refraction through Prism
Refraction at Curved Surfaces
Optical Instruments
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 158
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS_
~ SYNOPSIS-1
(Refraction of light at Plane surface)
Refraction of Light :When a beam of light is travelling from one medium to another
medium, a part of light gets reflected back into first medium at the inferface of
two media and the remaining part travels through second medium in another
direction. The change in the direction of light take place at the interface of two
media.
Deviation or bending of light rays from their original path while passing from one
medium to another is called refraction. (or)
The phenomenon due to which light deviates from its initial path, while travelling
from one optical medium to another optical medium is called refraction.
Refraction of light is due to change in speed of light passes from one medium to
another medium.
In case of refraction of light frequencey (colour) and phase do not change. But
wavelength and velocity will change.
Note: When light passes from one medium to another medium, the colour of light is
determined by its frequency not by its wavelength.
i
O Air
Medium
(glass) r
Refraction of light at plane surface:
refracted
light ray
Air
e emergent ray
Incident ray: A ray of light, traveling towards another optical medium, is called incident
ray.
Point of incidence: The point (O), where an incident ray strikes on another optical
medium, is called point of incidence.
Normal: A perpendicular drawn at the surface of seperation of two media on the point
of incidence, is called normal.
Angle of incidence (i): The angle which the incident ray makes with normal, is called
angle of incidence.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 159
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Refracted ray: A ray of light which deviates from its path on entering in another
optical medium is called refracted ray.
Angle of refraction(r): The angle which the refracted ray makes with normal, is called
the angle of refraction.
Angle of deviation due to refraction( ): It is the angle between the direction of
incident light ray and refracted light ray.
Emergent ray: A ray of light which emerges out from another optical medium as
shown in the above figure is called emergent ray.
Angle of emergence (e): The angle which the emergent ray makes with the normal is
called the angle of emergence.
Laws of Refraction:
Incident ray, refracted ray and normal always lie in the same plane.
The product of refractive index and sine of angle of incidence at a point in a
medium is constant, sin i = constant 1 sin i1 2 sin i2
If i1 i and i2 r then 1 sin i 2 sin r; This law is called snell’s law.
According to Snell’s law,
sin i 2
constant for any pair of medium and for light of given wavelength.
sin r 1
Note: The ratio between sine of angle of incidence to sine of angle of refraction is
commonly called as refractive index of the material in which angle of refraction
is situated with respect to the medium in which angle of incidence is situated.
sin i 2
When light ray travells from medium 1 to medium 2 then 1 2 refractive
sin r 1
index of medium (2) with respect to medium (1)
Note: Let us consider a ray of light travelling in situation as shown in fig.
Applying Snell’s law at each interface, we get
i
1
r1 r1 2
r2 r2
3
4
r3
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 160
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
1 sin i 2 sin r1 ; 2 sin r1 3 sin r2 3 sin r2 4 sin r3 ; It is clear that
1 sin i 2 sin r1 3 sin r2 4 sin r3 (or) sin i constant
Note: When light ray travells from medium of refractive index 1 to another medium of
sin i1 sin i2 sin i1 sin i2
refractive index 2 then, 1 sin i1 2 sin i2
V1 V2
When a light travels from optically rarer medium to optically denser medium
obliquely:
incident light ray
optically rarer
i medium (air)
O
optically denser r = ir
medium (glass)
refracted
light ray
a) it bends towards normal.
b) angle of incidence is greater than angle of refraction.
When a ray of light travels from optically denser medium to optically rarer
medium obliquely
incident
light ray
optically denser
i medium (glass)
optically rare
medium (air) r = r i
refracted
light ray
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 161
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
a) it bends away from the normal at the point of incidence.
b) angle of refraction is greater than angle of incidence.
c) angle of deviation r i .
Condition for no refraction : When an incident ray strikes normally at the point of
incidence, it does not deviates from its path.i.e., it suffers no deviation.
optically rare optically rare
medium (air) medium (air)
optically denser optically denser
medium (glass) medium (glass)
In this case angle of incedence (i) and angle of refraction(r)are equal and
i r 0.
If the refractive indices of two media are equal
i
1=
2=
r
1 2 From snell’s law, sin i sin r , sin i sin r i r
Hence, the ray passes without any deviation at the boundary.
Note: Because of the above reason a transperant solid is invisible in a liquid if their
refractive indices are same.
Refractive Index :
Absolute refractive Index ( ):
The absolute refractive index of a medium is the ratio of speed of light in free
space (C) to speed of light in a given medium (V).
veloctiy of light in free space (C)
velocity of light in a given medium (V)
It is a scalar. It has no units and dimensions.
For vaccum of free space, speed of light of all wavelengths is same and is equal to
C
C. So,for all wavelengths the refractive index of free space is 1.
C
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 162
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
For a given medium the speed of light is different for different wavelengths of
light, greater will be the the speed and hence lesser will be refractive index.
R V , So in medium V R
Note:
For a given light, denser the medium lesser will be the speed of light and so
greater will be the refractive index.
Example : Glass is denser medium when compared to water, so glass water .
The refractive index of water w 4 / 3 The refractive index of glass g 3 / 2
Foa a given light and given medium, the refractive index is also equal to the ratio
of wavelength of light in free space to that in the medium.
C fvaccum vaccum
V fmedium medium
(when light travells from vaccume to a medium, frequency does not change)
Note: If C is velocity of light in free space 0 is wavelength of given light in free space
C
then velocity of light in a medium of refractive index is Vmedium .
0
wavelength of given light in a medium of refractive index is medium
Relative Refractive Index: When light passes. from one medium to the other, the
refractive index of medium 2 relative to medium 1 is written as 1 2 and is given by
2 v1
1 2 ... 1
1 v 2
refractive index of medium 1 relative to medium 2 is
1 v 2
and 2 1 ... 2
2 1 2 v1
1
From eq. (1) & (2) 1 2 i.e., 1 2 . 2 1 1
2 1
Principle of Reversibility of Light
According to principle of reversibility, if a ray of light travels from X to Z along a
certain path, it will follow exactly the same path, while travelling from Z to X. In
other words the path of light is reversible.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 163
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
N
Normal
X
Medium A
(Rarer medium)
P Q
y
Medium B 90°
(Denser medium)
Z
Plane mirror
M
1
Note : a b
b a
Thus, the refractive index of medium ‘b’ with respect to ‘a’ is equal to the reciprocal
of refractive index of medium ‘a’ with respect to medium ‘b’.
Lateral Shift : In figure consider a ray AO incident on the slab at an angle of incidence
‘i’ and passing through a slab of thickness ‘t’. After two refractions at the boundary,
the ray emerge parallel to the incident ray. The perpendicular distance between
incident ray direction and emergent ray direction is called lateral shift or lateral
displacement (x)
Ai
O
r i-1
t Q
r
x
M P i i
From the figure, the distance PQ is called lateral displacement (or) lateral shift
PQ
From the traingle PQO, sin i r PQ x OP sin i r x = OP sin i r ...(1)
OP
OM OM t sin i r
But cos r , OP ....(2) from (1) and (2) x t
OP cos r cos r cos r
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 164
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Apparent Depth:
Case(1) : Object in denser medium and observer in rarer medium.
When object ‘O’ is placed at a distance ‘x’ from A in denser medium of refractive
index as shown in figure. Ray OA, which falls normally on the plane surface,
passes undeviated as AD. Ray OB, which ‘r’(with normal) on the palne surface,
bends away from the normal and passes as BC in air. Rays AD and BC meet at ‘I’
after extending these two rays backwards. This ‘I’ is the virtual image of real
object ‘O’ to an observer in rarer medium near to transmitted ray.
AB AB
sin i tan i ......(i) sin r tan r .......(ii)
AI AO
Dividing eq. (i) and (ii)
D
air
i C
A
i B
I r
x
r
O
sin i AO sin i
; According to Snell’ law
sin AI sin r
AO AO x
AI
AI
The distance of image AI is called apparent depth or apparent distance. The
xreal
apparent depth xapp is given by i.e., xapp
x
The apparent shift OI AO AI x
1
Hence the apparent shift OI 1 x
If the observer is in other than air medium of refractive index .
real depth realdepth
Then apparent depth relative
1
1 1
apparent depth
(real depth) apparent shift 1 x
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 165
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Note: If two objects O1 and O2 separated by ‘h’ on normal line to the boundary in a
medium of refractive index . These objects are observed from air near to normal
h
line of boundary. The distance between the images I1 and I 2 of O1 and O2 is .
air
I1
O1
h I2 h
O1O 2 h I1 I 2
O2
x1 x2 x3
Note: Apparent depth of object due to composite slab is xa
1 2 3
x1 1
x2 2
x3 4
O
Note: If there are ‘n’ number of parallel slabs which are may be in contact or may not
with different refractive indices are placed between the observer and the object,
then the total apparent shift
1 1 1
s 1 x1 1 x2 1 xn
1 2 n
Where x1, x2 ---- xn are the thickness of the slabs and 1 , 2 ....n are the
corresponding refractive indices.
Object in rarer medium and observer in denser medium : When the object in rarer
medium (air) at a distance’y’ from boundary and an observer near to normal in
denser medium of refractive index ‘ ’. By ray diagram in figure it is observed
that the image is virtual, on same side to boundary and its distance from the
boundary is times the object distance.
Since 1 image distance is more than object distance.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 166
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
r air
y O
y i
B
A
r
AB AB
sin i tan i ,sin r tan r According to Snell’s law 1.sin i sin r
AO AI
AB AB
, AI . AO
AO AI
Therefore apparent height of object (AI) x real height of object (AO)
i.e. yapp . yreal Apparent shift AI AO Apparent shift 1 y .
1
If the object is in other than air medium of refractive index . Then apparent
height rel (real height) ; i.e., ya = 1
y Apparent shift 1 1 y
Critical Angle and Total Internal Reflection :
Consider a point object O placed in a optically denser medium as shown in the
figure. Rays of light travel from O in all possible directions.
When light is refracted at the surface into the rarer medium, it bends away from
the normal.
Therefore, as the angle of incidence increases, the angle of refraction also
increases till for a certain angle of incidence, the angle of refraction is 900 and
light is refracted along the surface separting the two media. The corresponding
angle of incidence is called the critical angle C .
When light is incidence at any point beyond P, that is when the angle of
incidence is greater than the critical angle i C , then no light is refracted,
and the entire incident light is reflected into the same medium. This phenomenon
is known as the total internal reflection.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 167
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Expression for critical angle C :
According to Snell’s law, at critical angle of incidence
R R VD D
D .sin C R .sin 90 0 , sin C sin C
D VR R
D
1
For R 1 , D
s in C
Condition for total internal reflection :
For total internal reflection to take place light must be propagating from denser
to rarer medium. Ex: Ray from water to air, glass to water.
Total internal reflection will take place only if angle of incidence is greater than
critical angle. i.e.
1 R
i C with C sin
D
Looming : This effect occurs when the density of air decreases much more rapidly
with increasing height than it does under normal conditions. This situation
sometimes happens in cold regions particularly in the vicinity of the cold surface
of sea or of a lake. Light rays starting from an object S (say a ship) are curved
downward and on entering the eye the rays appear to come from S , thus giving an
impression that the ship is floating in air.
S
E S
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 168
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Field of vision of fish : - A fish at a depth ‘h’ from the surface of water of refractive
index can see the outer world through an inverted cone with
N N
r
c c
c c
fish
Vertex angle = 2C
Radius of the circular base of the cone formed on surface of water is given by
h 1 1
r h tan C sin C , tan C
2 1 2 1
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-1
1. Light of frequency n, wave length travelling with a velocity v enters into a
glass slab of R.I then frequency, wave length and velocity of the wave in glass
slab respectively are
n v v v n
1) , , 2) n, , 3) n, , 4) , , v
2. Absolute refractive index of a material depends upon
1) nature of material 2) nature, wavelength and size of material
3) density, temperature, wavelength of material
4) nature, temperature, wavelength of material
3. If a ray of light takes t1 and t 2 times in two media of absolute refractive indi-
ces 1 and 2 respectively to travel same distance, then
1) 1t1 2 t 2 2) 1t 2 2 t1 3) t1 1 t 2 2 4) t1 2 t 2 1
4. In cold countries, the phenomenon of looming takes place, because refractive
index of air
1) decreases with height 2) increases with height
3) does not change with height 4) become infinity at the surface
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 169
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
5. A ray of light passes through four transparent media with refractive indices
1 , 2 , 3 and 4 as shown in figure.
1 2 3 4
The surfaces of all media are parallel. If the emergent ray is parallel to the
incident ray, we must have
1) 1 2 2) 2 3 3) 3 4 4) 4 1
6. A hunter desires to shoot a fish whose image could be seen through clear
water. His aim should be
1) Above the apparent image of fish 2) Below the apparent image of fish
3) In the line of sight of fish 4) Parallel to the surface of water
7. A rectangular solid piece is placed in a liquid whose refractive index is the
same as that of the solid
1) The sides of the solid will appear to be bent inward
2) The sides of the solid will appear to be bent outward
3) The solid will not be seen at all 4) The solid will appear as in air
8. A plane glass plate is placed over various coloured letters. The letter which appears
to be raised least
1) violet 2) yellow 3) red 4) green
9. As temperature of medium increases the critical angle
1) Increases 2) Decreases 3) Remains same
4) first increases then decreases
10. A ball coated with ‘lamp black’ put in a glass tank containing water appears
silvery white due to
1) Refraction 2) Diffraction 3) Interference4) Total internal reflection
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. If the refractive index of diamond is 2.4 find the velocity of light in diamond.
c 3 10 m / s
8
1) 1.25 108 m / s 2) 2.25 108 m / s 3) 1.5 108 m / s 4) 4.5 108 m / s
2. If i j represents refractive index when a light ray goes from medium i into j, then
2 1 3 2 4 3 is equal to
1
1) 3 1 2) 3 2 3) 4) 2
1 4
4
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 170
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Multi Correct Choice Type:
9
3. The refractive index of glass with respect to water is . If the velocity and wavelength
8
of light in water are 2.25 108 ms 1 and 5400 A0 , then the velocity and wavelength
of light in glass are
1) Velocity of light in glass is 2×108 m/s 2) wavelength of light in glass is 4800A0
3) Velocity of light in glass is 1×108 m/s 4) wavelength of light in glass is 6700A0
4. The angle of incidence on the surface of a diamond of refractive index 2.4, if the
angle between the reflected and refracted rays is 900 is
1 1 1 1 1 1
2) sin 3) tan 4) cos
1
1) tan 2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
5. A ray of light passes normally through a slab 1.5 of thickness ‘t’. If the speed
of light in vacuum is ‘c’, then time taken by the ray to go across the slab is
t 3t 2t 4t
1) 2) 3) 4)
c 2c 3c 9c
6. A ray of light incident on a transparent block at an angle of incidence 600 . If of
block is 3 then the angle of deviation of the refracted ray is
1) 150 2) 250 3) 300 4) 450
Integer Answer Type:
7. A ray of light is incident at angle of 600 on a
3 cm thick plate 3 . The shift
in the path of the ray as it emerges out from the plate is (in cm) ____.
1) 1 2) 1.2 3) 0.5 4) 1.8
8. A bird in air is at a height ‘y’ from the surface of water. A fish is at a depth ‘x’
below the surface of water. The apparent distance of fish from the bird is (The
refractive index of water is )
y x x
1) x 2) x y 3) y 4) y
9. A fish looking up through the water see the outside world contained in a circular
4
horizon. If the refractive index of water is and fish is 12 cm below the surface,
3
the radius of this circle is (in cm)
36 36
1) 2) 4 5 3) 4) 36 7
5 7
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 171
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
10. When a light ray is refracted from one medium into another, the wavelength
changes from 4500 A0 to 3000 A0 . The critical angle for a ray from second medium
to first medium is
1 2 1 2 1 3 1 2
1) sin 2) cos 3) tan 4) tan
13 3 2 5
Single Correct Choice Type:
11. A ray of light is incident upon a parallel sided transparent slab of thickness 9 cm
at an angle of incidence 600 . If the angle of refraction is 300 , the lateral
displacement of the light ray is
2
1) 3 cm 2) 3 3 cm 3) 3 cm 4) cm
3
12. A beaker contains water up to a height h1 and kerosene of height h2 above water
so that the total height of ( water + kerosene ) is h1 h2 . Refractive index of
water is 1 and that of kerosene is 2 . The apparent shift in the position of the
bottom of the beaker when viewed from above is :
1 1 1 1
1) 1 h1 1 h2 2) 1 h2 1 h1
1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1
3) 1 h2 1 h1 4) 1 h1 1 h2
1 2 1 2
13. A vessel of depth ‘d’ filled with a liquid of refractive index 1 up to half its depth
and the remaining space is filled with a liquid of refractive index 2 . The apparent
depth while seeing normal to the free surface of the liquid is
1 1 d 1 1 d
1) d 2) d 1 2 3) 4) 1 2
1 2 2 1 2 2
Comprehension Type:
1
D
s in C
14. Light ray is travelling from a denser medium into a rarer medium. The velocity of
light in the denser and rarer medium is 2 108 m / sec . and 2.5 108 m / sec . The
critical angle of the two media is
1 5 1 4 1 1 1 3
1) sin 2) sin 3) sin 4) sin
4 5 2 5
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 172
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
15. The critical angle of light going from medium A into medium B is . The speed of
light in medium A is v. The speed of light in medium B is
v v
1) 2) v sin 3) 4) v tan
sin tan
16. Light takes t1 sec to travel a distance x cm in vacuum and takes t2 sec to travel
10x cm in a medium. The critical angle corresponding to the media is
1 10t1 1 t2 1 10t2 1 t1
1) sin 2) sin 3) sin 4) sin
t2 10t1 t1 10t2
Single Correct Choice Type:
17. A ray of light travels in the way as shown in the figure. After passing through
water, the ray grazes along the water air interface. The value of g interms of ‘i’
is w 4 / 3
Water
glass(g) i
1 3 4
1) 2) 3) 4) sin i
sin i 4sin i 3sin i
18. A layer of oil 3 cm thick is floating on a layer of coloured water 5 cm thick. The
refractive index of the coloured water is 5/3 and the apparent depth of the two
liquids is 36/7cm. Then the refractive index of the oil is
7 5 7 5
1) 2) 3) 4)
4 4 5 3
Comprehension Type:
Consider the situation in the figure. The bottom of the pot is a reflecting plane
mirror, S is a small fish, and T is a human eye. Refractive index of water is
T
H
H S
H/2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 173
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
19. At what distance from itself will the fish see the image of the eye by direct
observation?
1 1 H 1 1
1) H 2) H 3) 4) H
2 2 2 2 2
20. At what distance from itself will the fish see or observe the image of eye by
observing through mirror is
3 1 3 3
1) H 2) H 3) H 4) 2 H
2 2 2 2
21. At what distance from it self will the eye see the image of the fish upon direct
observation?
1 1 1 1
1) H 1 2) 2 H 1 3) 2 H 1 4) H
2 2 2 2
22. At what distance from itself will the eye see the image of the fish by observing
from the mirror?
3 3 3 3
1) 2 H 2) H 3) H 1 4) H 1
2 2 2 2
RAY OPTICS_
SYNOPSIS-2
Refraction through Prism
Prism is a transparent medium bounded by any number of surfaces in such a way
that the surface on which light is incident and the surface from which the light
emerges are plane and non-parallel as shown in figure.
refracting
second refracting
edge
first refracting
surface
surface
Incident A
ray emergent
ray
Principal section
of prism
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 174
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
The plane surface on which light is incident and emerges are called refracting
faces.
The angle between the faces on which light is incident and from which it emerges
is called refracting angle or apex angle or angle of prism (A).
The two refracting surfaces meet each other in a line called refracting edge.
A section of the prism by a plane perpendicular to the refracting edge is called
principal section
(a)
c
Angle of deviation means the angle between emergent and incident rays. While
measuring the deviation value in anticlock wise direction is taken as positive and
clock wise direction is negative.
= deviation angle
Note:If refractive index of the material of the prism is equal to that of sorroundings, no
refraction at its surfaces will takes place and light will pass through it undeviated
ie. 0 .
vii) Generally we use equilateral or right angled or Isosceles prism.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 175
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Determination of Refrative index of material of the prism for minimum devia-
tion
X
N1 M N2
i1
r1 r2 i2
Q R
P
N S
Y Z
Minimum Deviation
From the equation i1 i2 A , the angle of deviation depends upon angle of
incidence i1 . If we determine experimentally, the angle of deviation correspond-
ing to different angles of incidence and then plot a graph by taking angle of inci-
dence (i) on x-axis , angle of deviation on y-axis, we get the curve as shown in
figure.
min
X
O i1 i1 i2
i1
sin i s in i1 sin i 2
by snell’s law sin r sin r sin r
1 2
A min A min
sin sin
2 p 2
A m A
sin sin
2 2
Note:Deviaiton produced by small angled prism for small angle, from equation above
i1 i2
; i1 r1 , i2 r2 But i i A
r1 r2 1 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 176
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
r1 r2 A; r1 r2 A But r1 r2 A
For a prism immersed in a medium of refractive index m
1 A p 1 A
m
Note:There are two values of angle of incidence for same angle of deviation:
X
c
i1
r1 r2 i2
Q R
P
N S
Y Z
When a light ray is incident at an angle i1 at the surface (xy), it emerges at an
angle i2 from the surface (zx) with a deviation angle .As the path of light is
reversible, therefore if angle of incidence is i2 , at the face (xy), then the angle of
emergence will be i1 , with the same angle of deviation
Note:
i) For a given material of prism, wave length of light and angle of incidence. When
the angle of prism increases angle of deviation also increases as A .
ii) With increase in wavelength , deviation decreases ie. deviation for red is least
1
while maximum for violet as 1
iii) When a given prism is immersed in liquid, the angle of deviation changes as
r 1
Maximum deviation:
Deviation of ray will be maximum when the angle of incidence is maximum i.e i 900 .
Therefore the maximum deviation max 90 i2 A
Condition of grazing emergence: If a ray can emerge out of a prism, the value of angle
of incidence i1 for which angle of emergence i2 90 0 is called condition of grazing
emergence.
Condition of no emergence:A ray of light will not emerge out of a prism (what ever be
A
the angle of incidence) if A 2 C , i.e if cos ec
2
Note:Normal incidence- grazing emergence: If the incident ray falls normally on the
prism and grazes from the second surface, then
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 177
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
C
1 1
a) i1 r1 0, i2 900 and r2 C A b) A C sin c)Deviation d 90 C
Note:Grazing incidence - grazing emergence: If the incident ray falls on the prism
with grazing incidence and grazes from the second surface, then
C C
(i) i1 i2 90 0 (ii) r1 r2 C (iii)Angle of prism A 2 C
(iv) Deviation d 180 2C 180 A
Dispersion by a Prism :
When white light passes through a prism it splits up into different component
colours. This phenomenon is called dispersion and arises due to the fact that
refractive index of prism is different for different wave lengths. So different wave
lengths in passsing through a prism are deviated through different angles and as
1 , violet is deviated most while red is least deviated giving rise to display
of colours known as spectrum. The spectrum consists of visible and invisible re-
gions.
A r Screen
R
Whitelight
R
O
GY
IB
V
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 178
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-2
1. Recognize the prism (s) among the given figures.
a) b)
c) d)
1) b and c 2) c, a and b 3) only b 4) a, b, c, and d
2. Th e r efr act ive in dex of a m at er ial of a pr ism of an gles 45 – 45 – 900 is 1.5. The
0 0
path of the ray of light incident normally on the hypotenuse side is shown in
A A
90 90
1) 2)
45
45
45
45
B C B C
A A
90 90
3) 4)
45
45
45
B C B C
3. In the given figure,the angle between reflected ray is equal to :
1) A 2) 2 A 3) 3 A 4) 4 A
4. An equilateral prism is placed on a horizontal surface. A ray PQ is incident onto it.
For minimum deviation
R
Q S
P
1) PQ is horizontal 2) QR is horizontal
3) RS is horizontal 4) Any one will be horizontal
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 179
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
5. When a ray of light is refracted by a prism such that the angle of deviation is
minimum, then
1) the angle of emergence is equal to the angle of incidence
2) the angle of emergence is greater than the angle of incidence
3) the angle of emergence is smaller than the angle of incidence
4) the sum of the angle of incidence and the angle of emergence is equal to 90 0
6. If a small angled prism, made of glass is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1
and a ray of light is made incident on it, then
1) its deviation will be zero
2) it will suffer total reflection
3) the emergent ray is bent towards the edge of the prism
4) the emergent ray is bent towards the base of prism
7. Three prisms 1, 2 and 3 have A 60 , but refractive indices are 1.4, 1.5, 1.6 and
their angles of deviation are 1 , 2 , 3 respectively. Then
1) 3 2 1 2) 1 2 3 3) 2 1 3 4) 1 2 3
8. When white light enters a prism, its gets splits into its constituent colours. This is
due to;
1) high density of prism material
2) because is different for different wavelength
3) diffraction of light
4) interference of light
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. The fig shows a mixture of blue, green, red colours incident on a right angled
prism. The critical angles of the material of prism for red, green and blue colours
are 460 , 440 , 430 respectively, The arrangement will separate
B
G
45°
R
1) Red from Green and Blue 2) Blue from Green and Red
3) Green from Red and Blue 4) All the colours
2. A prism has a refracting angle of 600 . When placed in the position of minimumm
deviation, it produces a deviation of 300 . The angle of incidence is
1) 300 2) 450 3) 150 4) 600
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 180
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
3. Light falls at normal incidence on one face of a glass prism of refractive index 2.
Then the angle of emergence when the angle of the prism is 450
1) 450 2) 600 3) 750 4) 900
4. If a light ray incident normally on one of the faces of the prism of refractive index
2 and emergent ray just grazes the second face of the prism, then the angle of
deviation is
1) 00 2) 300 3) 600 4) 900
5. A ray of light passes through an equilateral prism such that the angle of incidence
3
is equal to angle of emmergence and the latter is equal to th of the angle of the
4
prism. The angle of deviation is
1) 450 2) 390 3) 200 4) 300
6. A ray of light incident on an equilateral prism shows minimum deviation of 300 .
The speed of light through the prism is
1) 2.121108 ms 1 2) 1.50 108 ms 1 3) 1.25 108 ms 1 4) 1.75 108 ms 1
7. A thin prism of 40 angle gives a deviation of 2.40 . The value of refractive index of
the material of the prism is
1) 1.6 2) 1.7 3) 1.8 4) 1.9
Matrix Match Type:
A
T
E d
Q
i1 R
8. r1 r2 i2
P D s
B C
In Case of the prism
Column-I Column-II
a) for normal incidence 1) i1 90 , r1 c, A r2 c
b) for normal emergence 2) i1 r1 0; A r2;D i2 A I2 r2
c) for grazing incidence 3) i2 r2 0; A r1;D i1 r1
d) for grazing emergence 4) i2 90 ; r2 c; A r1 c
5) D (i1 90 ) A
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 181
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Single Correct Choice Type:
4
9. A prism of R.I 1.5 is immersed in water of R.I as shown in the figure. For the
3
total internal reflection the correct choice is
B A
C
8 8 8 8
1) sin 2) sin 3) sin 4) sin
9 9 9 9
0
10. The angle of deviation by prism is 180 2 A . Its critical angle will be
1 A 1 A 1 A 1 A
1) sin tan 2) sin cot 3) cos cot 4) cos tan
2 2 2 2
11. ACB is right-angled glass prism of refractiveindex 1.5. A, B and C are 600 ,
300 and 900 respectively. A thin layer of liquid is on the surface AB. for a ray of
light which is incident normally on AC to be totally reflected at AB, the refractive
index of the liquid on AB should be
1) 1.5 2) 1.4 3) 1.3 4) 1.2
12. A beam of monochromatic light is incident on one face of the equilateral prism the
angle of incidence being 550 . If the angle of emergence is 460 , then the angle of
minimum deviation is
1) 410 2) 410 3) 410 4) 410
13. The maximum refractive index of a prism which permits passage of the light, through
it when the refractin angle of the prism is 900 , is
3 3
1) 3 2) 2 3) 4)
2 2
14. The refractive index of the material of prism is 2 and its refracting angle is 300 .
One of the refracting surfaces of the prism is made a mirror in wards. A beam of
monochromatic light enters the prism from the other surface and the ray retraces
from the mirrored surface. The angle of incidence is
1) 300 2) 450 3) 600 4) 00
Single Correct Choice Type:
15. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on one refracting face of a prism of angle
750 . It passes through the prism and is incident on the other face at the critical
angle. If the refractive index of the material of the prism is 2 , the angle of
incidence on the first face of the prism is,
1) 300 2) 450 3) 600 4) 00
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 182
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
16. The light ray is incident at an angle of 600 on a prism of angle 450 . When the light
ray falls on the other surface at 900 , the refractive index of the material of the
prism and angle of deviation ‘d’ are given by
3 3
1) 2, d 30 0 2) 1.5, d 150 3) , d 300 4) , d 150
2 2
17. When a glass prism of refracting angle 600 is immersed in a liquid its angle of
minimum deviation is 300 . The critical angle of glass with respect to the liquid
medium is
1) 300 2) 450 3) 600 4) 500
18. Angle of prism is ‘A’ and its one surface is silvered. Light rays falling at an angle of
incidence 2 A on first surface return back through the same path after suffering
reflection at second silvered surface. Refractive index of the material of the prism
is
1) 2SinA 2) 2CosA 3) 1/ 2CosA 4) tan A
19. A ray of light incident normally on an isosceles right angled prism travels as
shown in the figure. The refractive index of the prism must be greater than
1) 2 2) 3 3) 1.5 4) 2
RAY OPTICS_SYNOPSIS-3
(Refraction at Spherical surfaces)
A part of a sphere of refracting material is called a spherical refracting surface.
Some important terms related to spherical refracting surface are given below:
A
Radius of
curvature
P
Principal axis Pole C
(Centre of curvature)
Rarer medium Denser medium
B
The point ‘P’ in the figure is the pole (P)
The centre of the sphere of which the refracting surface forms a part is called the
centre of curvature (C) of the spherical refracing surface.
The radius of the sphere of which the refracting surface forms a part is called the
radius of curvature of the spherical refracting surface (R)
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 183
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
The diameter of the spherical refracting surface is called its aperture. In the
figure, the line joining A and B is the aperture of the spherical refracting surface.
The line joining the pole and centre of curvature and extends on either side of
the surface is called the principal axis.
Sign convention:All the distances are measured from the pole of the spherical refracting
surface.
The distance measured in the direction of the incident light are taken as positive.
Refraction at Sperical surfaces :Consider refraction at a spherical interface between
two transparent media. The normal at the point of incidence is perpendicular to
the tangent plane to the spherical surface at that point and therefore, passes
through its centre of curvature.
1 N
2
i
r
O M C I
u R
V
Figure shows the geometry of formation of image I of an object ‘O’ on the principal
axis of spherical surface with centre of curvature C, and radius of curvature R.
The rays are incident from a medium of refractive index 1 to another of refractive
index 2 . As before, we take like in curved mirrors the aperture of the surface to
be small compared to other distances involved. Hence NM will be taken to be
nearly equal to the length of the perpendicular from the point N on the principal
axis.
MN MN MN
tan , tan , tan Now for NOC, 'i ' is the exterior angle.
OM MC MI
Therefore, i Similarly r NCM NIM
Now by Snell’s law 1.sin i 2 .sin r or for small angles 1.i 2 .r substituting i & r,
1 1
we get 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
OM MI MC
Here OM, MI and MC represent magnitude of distances, applying sign convertions.
OM u, MI v, MC R
2 1 2 1
v u R
This is the Gaussion’s relation for a single spherical refracting surface. Though
above relation is derived for a convex surface and for a real object and real image,
it is equally valid for all other conditions.
If we move in the direction of light, 1 is the refractive index of the medium which
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 184
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
comes before the boundary and 2 is the refractive index of the medium which
comes after the boundary.
If the object or image itself is present at a refracting surface, refraction at that
surface is not considered.
It is note that with respect to real object convex refracting surfaces can form real
image (for distant object) as well as virtual image (for nearer object), where as
concave refracting surface forms only virtual image.
Magnification
Lateral magnification or transverse magnification:
1
2
h0
i C I
r hi
u v
hi
From figure, the lateral magnification is mt
h0
From Snell’s law: 1i 2 .r (for small angles)
h0 h h i 1 v
Therefore 1 2 i mt .
u v
Thus lateral magnification
h 0 2 u
Longitudinal magnification at refracting curved surface: If a small object of length
‘du’ is placed on the axis, produces an image of length ‘dv’ along the axis of the
refracting surface, then longitudinal magnification
dv 2 1 2 1 dv 1 v 2
mL ; Since On differentiating, .
du v u R du 2 u 2
1 v 2 2 2
mL Longitudinal magnification mL m .
2 u 2 1
Where ‘ m t ’ is transverse magnification.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 185
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Principal FOCI :
2 1 2 1
In the equation
v u R
If the object at infinity i.e., u
1
1 2
2
O
F2 F1
f2 f2
fig (a) fig (b)
2 1 2R
0 2 From figure, it is clear that v f 2 f2
v R 2 1
i.e. The position of image corresponding to the object at infinity, is called the
second principal focus of the refracting surface. This is shown in fig (a)
Similarly if v , i.e., the object is so placed that the refracting rays becomes
2 1 2 1
parallel to the principal axis, then From figure, it is clear
u R
1R
that u f1 f 1
2 1
i.e. The position of the object, whose image is formed at infinity to known as the
first principal focus of the refracting surface. This is shown in figure(b).
f1 1
Hence
f2 2
It is easy to see that first focal length f1 for spherical refracting surface is not
equal to the second focal length f 2 .
2 1 2 1
Further
v u R
2 R 1R f 2 f1
1 1
v 2 1 u 2 1 v u
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 186
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-3
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. An air bubble in glass 1.5 is situated at a distance 3 cm from a convex
surface of diameter 10 cm as shown. The distance from surface at which the
image of bubble appears is
= 1.5 = 1
3cm
1) 2.5 cm 2) 5 cm 3) 4 cm 4) 1.5 cm
2. Light from a point source in air falls on a spherical glass surface ( 1.5 and
radius of curvature 20 cm). The distance of the light source from the glass surface
is 100 cm. The position where image is formed is
1) 50 cm 2) 100 cm 3) 125 cm 4) 25 cm
3. A spherical convex surface of radius of curvature R separates air a 1 from
glass a g 1.5 . The centre of curvature is in the glass. A point object P placed in
air is found to have a real image Q in the glass. The line PQ cuts the surface at a
point O and PO OQ . The distance PO is equal to
1) 5 R 2) 3 R 3) 2 R 4) 1.5 R
4. A denser medium of refractive index 1.5 has a concave surace with respect to air
of radius of curvature 12 cm. An object is situated in the denser medium at a
distance of 9 cm from the pole locate the image due to refraction in air
1) A real image at 8 cm 2) a virtual image at 8 cm
3) A real image at 4.8 cm 4) A virtual image at 4.8 cm
5. The human eye can be regarded as a single spherical refractive surface of
curvature of cornea 7.8 mm. If a parallel beam of light comes to focus at 3.075 cm
behind the refractive surface, the refractive index of the eye is
1) 1.34 2) 1.72 3) 1.5 4) 1.61
6. A glass sphere 1.5 of radius 20 cm has small air bubble 4 cm below its
centre. The sphere is viewed from outside and along vertical line through the
bubble. The apparent depth of the bubble below the surface of sphere is (in cm)
1) 13.33 2) 26.67 3) 15 4) 30
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 187
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
7. A ray of light falls on a transparent sphere with centre at C as shown in figure.
The ray emerges from the sphere parallel to line AB. the refractive index of the
sphere is
C
A B
60°
3 1
1) 2 2) 3 3) 4)
2 2
8. A mark is made on the surface of a glass sphere of diameter 10 cm and refractive
index 1.5. It is viewed through the glass from a portion directly opposite. The
distance of the image of the mark from the centre of the sphere will be
1) 15 cm 2) 17.5 cm 3) 20 cm 4) 22.5 cm
9. In a medium of refractive index 1.6 and having a convex surface with respect to
air has a point object in it at a distance of 12 cm from the pole. The radius of
curvature is 6 cm. Locate the image as seen from air
1) A real image at 30 cm 2) A virtual image at 30 cm
3) A real image at 4.28 cm 4) A virtual image at 4.28 cm
10. Parallel rays are incident on a transparent sphere along its one diameter. After
refraction, these rays converge at the other end of this diameter. The refractive
index for the material of sphere is
1) 1 2) 1.5 3) 1.6 4) 2
Integer Answer Type:
11. A mark on the surface of a glass sphere 1.5 is viewed from a diametrically
opposite position. It appears to be at a distance 10 cm from its actual position. The
radius of the sphere is __________cm.
Matrix Match Type:
12. Two transparent media of refractive indices 1 & 3 have a solid lens shaped
transparent material of refractive index 2 between them as shown in figures in
figures in Column – II. A ray traversing these media is also shown in the figures.
In Column – I different relationships between 1 , 2 and 3 are given. Match
them to the ray diagrams shown in Column – II.
Column – I Column – II
3 2 1
(A) 1 2 (p)
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 188
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
(B) 1 2 (q) 3 2 1
(C) 2 3 (r) 2 1
3
(D) 2 3 (s) 2 1
3
(t) 2 1
3
Single Correct Choice Type:
13. A glass sphere 1.5 of radius 20 cm has a small air bubble 4 cm below its
centre. The sphere is viewed from outside and along a vertical line through the
bubble. The apparent depth of the bubble below the surface of sphere is ( in cm)
1) 13.33 2) 26.67 3) 15 4) 30
14. A ray of light is incident on a glass sphere of refractive index 3/2. What should be
the angle of incidence so that the ray which enters the sphere does not come out
of the sphere is
1 1 1
1) tan 2 / 3 2) sin 2 / 3 3) 900 4) cos 1/ 3
15. There is a small air bubble inside a glass sphere 1.5 of radius 10 cm. The
bubble is 4 cm below the surface and is viewed normally from the outside. The
apparent depth of the bubble is
1) 3 cm below the surface 2) 5 cm below the surface
3) 8 cm below the surface 4) 10 cm below the surface
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 189
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS
SYNOPSIS-4
(Thin lenses)
Refraction by Lenses
Lens theory :A lens is a piece of transparent material with two refracting surfaces
such that atleast one is curved and refractive index of its material is different
from that of the surroundings.
If the curved surface (or surfaces) of a lens are spherical, the lens is called
spherical lens and if its thickness is small the lens is called thin.
Here we shall limit ourselves to thin spherical lenses.
Different types of spherical lens are shown in figure (a) and (b)
R1 R2 R R R
Bi convex Equl convex Plano convex
lens lens lens
Fig. (a) Convex Lens
Bi concave Equi concave Plano
concave
Fig. (b) Concave Lens
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 190
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Convexo Concavo
- concave - convex
Fig. (c) Meniscus
Note: While calling the name of the lens we called first the shape of the surface which
has more radius of curvature is to be considered.
A thin lens with refractive index greaterthan that of surroundings behaves as a
convergent or convex lens if its central portion is thicker than marginal one. i.e.
it converge if parallel rays incident on it.
If the central portion of a lens (with L m ) is thinner than marginal, it diverges
parallel rays and behaves as divergent or concave lens.
Note: A thin lens is a lens in which the thickness of the lens is small compared to the
object distance (or) the image distance or either of the two radii of curvature of
the lens.
In case of thin spherical lenses: Optical centre (or) pole O is a point for a given lens
through which any ray passes undeviated.
c2 O c1 c1 O c2
F2
R1 R2 R1 R2
If the lens has two spherical surfaces, there are two centres of curvature C1 and
C2 and correspondingly two radii of curvature R1 and R 2 .
Principal axis C1C2 is a line passing through optical centre and centres of curvature
of two refracting surfaces. It is perpendicular to the lens.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 191
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
A lens has two surfaces and hence two focal points. First focal point ( F1 ) is an
object point (real in case of a convex lens and virtual for concave) on the princiapl
axis for which image is formed at infinity.
F1
F1
(a) (b)
Second focal point ( F2 ) is an image point on the principal axis for which object lie
at infinity.
F2 F2
.
(a) (b)
The distance between optical centre of a lens and the point where the parallel
beam of light converges or appears to converge. i.e., second principal focal point
( F2 ), is called focal length f.
To a lens, if the media on the two sides is same, then first principal focal distance
is equal to second pricipal focal distance. i.e., f1 f 2 .
Note: We are mainly concerned with the second focus F2 because wherever we write
the focal length ‘f’ measures second principal focal length.
Focal plane: It is a plane passing through the principal focus and perpendicular to the
principal axis.
Aperture: In referance to a lens, aperture is the effective diameter of its light
transmitting area. The intensity of image formed by a lens depends on square of
2
aperture. i.e., I apeture
Sign convention: Whenever and where ever possible, rays of light are taken to travel
from left to right.
Transverse distance measured above the principal axis are taken to be positive
while those below it negative.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 192
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Longitudinal distances are measured from optical centre and are taken to be
positive if in the direction of light propagation and negative if opposite to it.
Note: While using the sign convention it must be kept in mind that, to calculate an
unknown quantity the known quantities are substituted with sign in a given
formula.
Incident Incident
light R1 R2 light R1 R2
C2 F C1 C1 F C2
(a) (b)
For convex lens as shown in fig.(a)
R1 OC1 is +ve; R 2 OC2 is -ve
f OF is +ve
For concave lens as shown in fig. (b)
R1 OC1 is -ve; R 2 OC2 is +ve
f OF is -ve
Rules for image formation: In order to locate the image and its nature by a lens
graphically following rules are adopted.
A ray parallel to the principal axis after refraction passes through the principal
focus for convex lens and appears to diverge from focus for concave lens.
F2
F2
(a) (b)
A ray passing through the first focus F1 becomes parallel to the principal axis
after refraction.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 193
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
F1
F1
(a) (b)
Magnification
Lateral magnification:Magnification produced by a lens is defined as the ratio of the
size of image to that of the object. Here the sizes being measured perpendicular
to principal axis.
II1 h v
mt 1
1
OO h 0 u
O1
h0 I
O h1
I1
u v
When we apply the sign convention, for erect (and virtual) image formed by a
convex or concave lens ‘m’ is positive, while for an inverted (and real) image, m is
negative.
Note: Linear magnification for a lens can also be expressed as
I v f v f
m
O u f f u
Longitudinal magnification: Longitudinal magnification is defined as the ratio of
infinitesimal axial length (dv) in the region of the image to the corresponding
length (du) in the region of the object.
dv
Longitudinal magnification mL
du
1 1 1
On differentiating equation
v u f
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 194
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
dv du dv du
2
2 0 or 2 2 0
v u v u
2
dv v 2 v
Therefore, m L m2
du u 2 u
So, longitudinal magnification is proportional to the square of the lateral
magnification.
Angular magnification of lens:The ratio of the slopes of emergent ray and corresponding
incident ray with principal axis is called the angular magnification.
1 2
O I
tan 2
Angular magnification
tan 1
Note: When several lenses are used co-axially, the total magnification
m m1 m2 .... mn .
From the ray diagrams it is clear that
Regarding convex lens: A convex lens will form a real image for a real object when the
object is placed beyond focus.
When the object comes with in the focus, then a virtual image is formed for the
real object.
The real image formed is always inverted while virtual image is always erect.
Regarding concave lens: A concave lens always form virtual image for a real object.
The image formed by a concave lens is always erect and diminished in size.
A concave lens can form a real image as well as virtual image if the object is
virtual.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 195
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Lens formula : Lens formula is a relation connecting focal length of the lens with
1 1 1
the object distance and image distance. The formula is
f u
Note: The above formula is valid for convex as well as concave lenses and it is
independent of nature of the image (real or virtual)
Note: To solve the problems, the above equation can also be expressed as follows
uf vf vu
v ,u ,f
uf f v uv
a) Convexlens & b) Concave lens
Position
Ray diagram Image details
of the
object
F2 Real inverted,
At Infinity
F1 diminished at F
I
Real, inverted,
Between F I 2F diminished
and 2F O 2F F between F
and 2F
O
F 2F Real, inverted,
At 2F 2F I equal, at 2F
Real, inverted,
Between F 2F I enlarged,
2F and F 2F O F between 2F
and infinity
O
Real, inverted,
F 2F enlarged
At F
F at infinity
Virtual, erect,
Between P enlarged and
F and P IFO F on the side
of the object
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 196
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Lens Maker’s formula and Lens formula :
In case of image formation by a lens, the incident ray is refracted at first and
second surface respectively. The image formed by the first surface acts as object
for the second.
Consider an object O is placed at a distance u from a convex lens as shown in
figure. Let its image is I1 after refraction through first surface. So from the
formula for refraction at curved surface.
R2
R1
u2 u1
u1 F F
O I2 I1
v
u v1
2 1 2 1
v u R
2 1 2 1
For first surface .... (1)
v1 u R1
The image I1 is acts as object to second surface, and form final image I2
1 2 1 2
For second surface .... (2)
v v1 R2
So adding (1) and (2) equation, we have
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
1 2 1 or 1
v u R1 R 2 v u 1 R 1 R 2
1 1 1 1 2
r 1 with r or L
v u R1 R 2 1 M
If object is at infinity, image will be formed at the focus
1 1 1
i.e. for u , v f , so that above equation becomes r 1
f R1 R 2
Which is known as Lens-maker’s formula and
1 1 1
For a lens it becomes which is known as the “lens - formula” or “Gauss’s
v u f
formula” for a lens.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 197
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Though we derived it for a real image formed by a convex lens, the formula is
valid for both convex as well as concave lens and for both real and virtual images.
Note:The lens maker’s formula is applicable for thin lenses only and the value of R1
and R 2 are to be put in accordance with tthe Cartesian sign convention.
Power of A Lens :The power of lens is the measure of its ability to produce convergence
or divergence of a parallel beam of light.
The S.I unit of power is diopter (D) and 1D 1m1
1 100
i.e. P f in m f in cm D
A convex lens converge the incident rays. Due to this reason, the power of a
convex lens is taken as positive. On the other hand, a concave lens diverge the
incident rays. Therefore its power is taken as negative.
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-4
1. The focal length of a lens depends on
1) colour of light 2) radius of curvature of the lens
3) material of the lens 4) all the above
2. fB and fR are focal lengths of a convex lens for blue and red light respectively
and FB and FR are the focal lengths of the concave lens for blue and red light
respectively. We must then have
1) f B > fR and FB FR 2) fB < fR and FB FR
3) f B > fR and FB FR 4) fB < fR and FB FR
3. The graph drawn with object distance along abscissa and image distance along
ordinate measuring the distance from the convex lens is
1) Straight line 2) Parabola 3) Circle 4) A hyperbola
4. A convex lens is used to form a real image of the object shown in the following
figure:
1 2
4 3
Then the real inverted image is as shown in the following figure:
1 2 2 1
1) 2)
4 3 3 4
4 3 3 4
3) 4)
1 2 2 1
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 198
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
5. The relation between refractive indices , 1 , 2 . if the behaviour of light ray is
as shown in fig.
1 2
1) 2 1 2) 2 1 3) 2 ; 1 4) 2 1 ; 2
6. If parallel beam of light falls on a convex lens. The path of the rays is shown in
fig. It follows that
1 2
1) 1 2 2) 1 2 3) 1 2 4) 1 2
7. Lens maker's formula is applicable to
1) Thin lenses and paraxial rays which subtend very small angles with the principal
axis
2) Thick lenses and paraxial rays which subtend very small angels with the
principles axis
3) Thin lenses and for marginal rays
4) Thick lenses and for marginal rays
8. A spherical air bubble in water will act as
1) a convex lens 2) a concave lens
3) Plane glass plate 4) Plano-concave lens
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A beam of light converges at a point P. Now a convex lens of focal length 20 cm
placed in the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from P. The point at which the
beam converges now is
1) 7.5cm right side of the lens 2) 7.5 cm left side of the lens
3) 15.2 cm right side of lens 4) 15.2 cm left side of lens
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 199
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
2. The radius of curvature of the convex surface of a thin plano - convex lens is 15
cm and the refractive index of its material is 1.6. The power of the lens is
1) +1 D 2) –2 D 3) +3 D 4) +4 D
3. A double convex lens is made of glass which has refractive index 1.55 for violet
rays and 1.50 for red rays. If the focal length of violet rays is 20 cm, the focal
lenght of red rays is
1) 9 cm 2) 18 cm 3) 20 cm 4) 22 cm
4. The refractive index of the material of a double convex lens is 1.5 and its focal
length is 5 cm. If the radii of curvatures are equal, the value of radius of curvature
is (in cm)
1) 5 2) 6.5 3) 8 4) 9.5
5. A diverging meniscus lens of 1.5 refractive index has concave surfaces of radii 3
and 4 cm. The position of image if an object is placed 12cm infront of the lens is
1) -24 cm 2) –8 cm 3) 8 cm 4) 24 cm
6. A beam of light converges at a point P. Now a concave lens of focal length -16 cm is
placed in the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from P. The point at which the
beam converges now is
1) 6.86cm right side of the lens 2) 6.86cm left side of the lens
3) 48cm right side of the lens 4) 48cm left side of the lens
7. The radius of curvature of convex surface of plano convex lens is 10 cm and its
focal length is 30 cm, then the refractive index of the material of the lens is
1) 3 2) 1.5 3) 1.66 4) 1.33
8. Focal length of a lens is 0.12 m and refractive index is 1.5. Focal length of the
same lens for blue colour is 0.1m. Then refractive index of the lens for blue colour
is
1) 1.51 2) 1.25 3) 1.49 4) 1.6
9. The focal length of a biconvex lens is 20 cm and its refractive index is 1.5. If the
radii of curvatures of two surfaces of lens are in the ratio 1:2, then the larger
radius of curvature is (in cm)
1) 10 2) 15 3) 20 4) 30
10. The radii of curvature of the two surfaces of a lens are 20 cm and 30 cm and the
refractive index of the material of the lens is 1.5. If the lens is concavo convex
then the focal length of the lens is
1) 24 cm 2) 10 cm 3) 120 cm 4)24cm
Multi Correct Choice Type:
11. Which of the following form(s) a virtual and erect image for all positions of the
real object?
1) Convex lens 2) Concave lens 3) Convex mirror 4) Concave mirror
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 200
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Matrix Match Type:
12. An optical component and an object S placed along its optic axis are given in
Column – I. The distance between the object and the component can be varied.
The properties of images are given in Column II. Match all the properties of images
from Column – II with the appropriate components given in Column I. Indicate
your answer by darkening the appropriate bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given in the
ORS.
Column – I Column – II
S
(A) (p) Real image
S
(B) (q) Virtual image
S
(C) (r) Magnified image
S
(D) (s) Image at infinity
Matrix Match Type:
13. Column – I Column – II
(i) Converging system (A) convex lens
(ii) Diverging system (B) concave lens
(iii) Virtual Image is (C) concave mirror
formed by
(iv) Magnification < 1 (D) convex mirror
is possible with
Single Correct Choice Type:
14. An object is placed first at infinity and then at 20 cm from the object side focal
plane of a convex lens. The two images thus formed are 5 cm apart. The focal
length of the lens is
1) 5 cm 2) 10 cm 3) 15 cm 4) 20 cm
15. The image of a square hole in a screen illuminated by light is obtained on another
screen with the help of converging lens. The distance of the hole from the lens is
40 cm. If the area of the image is nine times that of the hole, the focal length of
the lens is
1) 30 cm 2) 50 cm 3) 60 cm 4) 75 cm
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 201
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
16. A plano convex lens of focal length 30 cm has its plane surface silvered. An object
is placed 40 cm from the lens on the convex side. The distance of the image from
the lens is
1) 18 cm 2) 24 cm 3) 30 cm 4) 40 cm
17. The graph shows the variation of magnifictaion m produced by convex lens with
image distance v . The focal length of the lens is used is :
m b
V
C
b b bc c
1) 2) 3) 4)
c ca a b
18. A convex lens of focal length f is placed somewhere in between the object and a
screen. The distance between object and screen is x . If magnification produced
is m , the focal length of the lens is
mx mx m 1
2
m 1
2
1) 2 2) 2 3) x 4) x
m 1 m 1 m m
4
19. A thin liquid convex lens is formed in glass. Refractive index of liquid is and
3
3
that of glass is . If ‘f’ is the focal length of the liquid lens in air, its focal length
2
and nature in the glass is
1) f, convex 2) f, concave 3) 2f, concave 4) 3f, concave
20. A thin converging lens of refractive index 1.5 has a focal power of 5 D. When this
lens is immersed in a liquid, it acts as a diverging lens of focal length 100 cm.
The refractive index of the liquid is
11 9 5
1) 2) 3) 4) 2
6 5 3
Single Correct Choice Type:
21. Two plano concave lenses of glass of refractive index 1.5 have radii of curvature
20 cm and 30 cm respectively. They are placed in contact with the curved surface
towards each other and the space between them is filled with a liquid of refractive
index 5/2. The focal length of the combination is (in cm)
1) 6 2) –92 3) 108 4) 12
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 202
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
22. Two converging glass lenses ‘A’ and ‘B’ have focal lengths in the ratio 2 : 1. The
radius of curvature of first surface of lens ‘A’ is 1/4th of the second surface where
as the radius of curvature of first surface of lens ‘B’ is twice that of second
surface. Then the ratio between the radii of the first surfaces of A and B is
1) 5 : 3 2) 3 : 5 3) 1 : 2 4) 5 : 6
23. Image of an object at infinity is formed by a convexlens of focal length 30 cm such
that the size of the image is 12 cm. If a concave lens of focal length 20 cm is
placed in between the convexlens and the image, at a distance 26 cm from the
convexlens, size of the new image is
1) 2.5 cm 2) 2.0 cm 3) 1.025 cm 4) 1.05 cm
RAY OPTICS
SYNOPSIS-5
(Optical Instruments)
Optical Instruments : Optical instruments are used primarily to assist the eye in
viewing the object. Optical instruments are classified into three groups, they are
a) visual instruments Ex: microscope, telescope
b) photographing and projecting instruments Ex: cameras
c) analysing and measuring instruments Ex: spectrometer
Optical instruments such as telescope and microscopes have one object lens and
one eye lens. The lens towards the object is called objective and the lens towards
eye is called eye piece. Single lens forms images with defects (aberrations). If the
eye is placed near to the eye lens it will not recieve marginal rays of the eye lens.
This reduces the field of view and the intensity is not uniform in the field of view,
the central part being brighter than the marginal part.
So in designing telescopes and microscopes for practical purposes, combination of
lenses are used for both objective and eye lenses to minimize aberrations. A combi-
nation of lenses used as an eye lens is known as eyepiece. In any eyepiece that
lens near to the objective is called field lens and the lens near to the eye is called
eye lens. The field lens increase the field of view and the eye lens acts as a
magnifier. We consider two eyepieces namely, Ramsden’s eyepiece and Huygen’s
eyepiece.
The Eye:The light enters the eye through a curved front surface, called cornea and
passes through the pupil which is the central hole in the iris. The size of pupil can
change under control muscles. The cornea-lens-fluid system isequivalent to single
converging lens.
The light focused by the lens on retina which is a film of nerve fibres. The retina
contains rods and cones which sense the light intensity and colour respectively.
The retina transmit electrical signals to the brain through optic nerve.
The shape (curvature) and focal length of the eye lens may be adjusted by the
ciliary muscles. The image formed by this eye lens is real, inverted and diminished
at the retina.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 203
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
The size of the image on the retina is roughly proportional to the angle subtended
by the object on the eye. This angle is known as the visual angle.Therefore it is
known as the angular size.
h
X I
h
Y I
When the object is distant, its visual angle and hence image at retina is small
and object looks smaller.
When the object is brought near to the eye its visual angle and hence size of
image will increase and object looks larger as shown in figure (b)
Optical instruments are used to increase this visual angle artificially in order to
improve the clarity.
Eg : Microscope, Telescope
When the eye is focussed on a distant object 0 the ciliary muscles are relaxed
so that the focal length of the eye-lens has maximum value which is equal to its
distance from the retina.
When the eye is focussed on a closer object ( increases) the ciliary muscles of the
eye are strained and focal length of eye lens decreases. The ciliary muscles adjust
the focal length in such a way that the image is again formed on the retina and we
see the object clearly. This process of adjusting focal length is called accomodation.
If the object is brought too close to the eye the focal length cannot be adjusted to
form the image on the retina.Thus there is a minimum distance for the clear vision
of an object.
The nearest point at which an object is seen clearly by the eye is called the near
point of the eye and distance of near point from the eye is called the least distance
of distinct vision, It is equal to 25cm for normal eye and it is denoted by D.
The farthest point from an eye at which an object is distinctly seen is called far
point and for a normal eye it is theoretically at infinity.
Deffects of Vision: Our eyes are marvellous organs that have the capability to interpret
incoming electromagnetic waves as images through a complex process. But over
eye may develop some defects due to various reasons. Some common optical defects
of the eye are a)myopia b) hypermetropia c) presbyopia
Myopia: The light from a distant object arriving at the eye lens may be converged
at a point infront of the retina. This defect is called Myopia (or) shortsightedness.In
thi s defect, the far point of the eye is at a distance lesser than infinity, and
distant objects are not clearly visible.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 204
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
This defect is rectified by using spectacles having divergent lens (concave lens)
which forms the image of a distant object at the far point of defected eye.
From lens formula
1 1 1
P
F .P dis tan ce of object f
Where F.P= Far point of the defective eye. If the object is at infinity
1 1
Power of lens (p)=
f F .P
Hypermetropia: (or) Long-sightedness.
The light from an object at the eye lens may be converged at a point behind the
retina. This defect is called
In this type of defect, near point is at a distance greater than 25cm and near
objects are not clearly visible.
This defect is rectified by using spectacles having convergent lens(i.e convex lens)
which forms the image of near objects at the near point of the defected eye (which
is more than 25cm)
1 1 1
P
N .P. dis tan ce of object f
N.P.= Near Point of defected eye.
If the objective is placed at D=25cm=0.25m
1 1 1
P
f 0.25 N .P.
Presbyopia: The power of accomodation of eyelens may change due to the decreasing
effectiveness of ciliary muscles.So, far point is lesser than infinity and near point
is greater than 25cm and both near and far objects are not clearly visible. This
defect is called presbyopia.This defect is rectified by using bifocal lens.
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 205
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
Astigmatism: This defect arises due to imperfect spherical nature of lens, the focal
length of eye lens in two orthogonal directions becomes different, eye cannot see
objects in two orthogonal directions clearly simultaneously. This defect is remedied
by cylindrical lens in a particular direction.
W.E-1: A person cannot see distinctly any object placed beyond 40cm from his eye.
Find the power of lens which will enable him to see distant stars clearly is?.
Sol: The person cannot see objects clearly beyond 0.4m.
so his far point = 0.4m distance of object = .
He should use lens which forms image of distant object u at a distance of
40cm infront of it.
1 1 1 10
p; P 2.5D
0.40 f 4
W.E-2: A far sighted person cannot focus distinctly on objects closer than 1m.
What is the power of lens that will permit him to read from a distance of
40cm?
Sol: As near point is 1m and distance of objects is 0.40m
both in front of lens.
1 1 1 1 1
P P 1.5D
f v u 1 0.40
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-5
1. When objects at different distances are seen by the eye, which of the following
remians constant
1) The focal length of the eye lens
2) The object distance from the eye lens
3) The radii of curvature of the eye lens
4) The image distance from the eye lens
2. Near and far points of healthy human eye respectively are
1) 0 and 25 cm 2) 0 and infinity
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 206
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
3) 25cm and 100 cm 4) 25 cm and infinity
3. The ability of eye to focus on both near and far objects is called
1) Presbyopia 2) Myopia
3) Hypermetropia 4) Power of accommodation
4. Loss of the eye to focus on both far and near
objects with advancing age is
1) Astigmatism 2) Presbyopia
3) Myopia 4) Hypermetropia
5. The image of an object formed on the retina of the eye is
1) virtual and inverted 2) virtual and erect
3) real and erect 4) real and inverted
6. Myopia occurs due to
1) Increase in the focal length of eye lens
2) Decrease in the distance between retina and lens
3) Decrease in focal length of eye lens
4) Increase in the distance between retina and lens
7. For a myopic (short-sighted) eye, rays from far distant objects are brought to focus
at a point
1) on the retina 2) Behind the retina
3) In between eye lens and retina 4) At any position
8. In the case of hyper metropia
1) the image of a near object is formed behind the retina
2) the image of a distant object is formed infront of the retina
3) a concave lens should be used for correction
4) a bifocal lens should be used for correction
9. Long -sighted people who have lost their spectacles can still read a book by looking
through a small (3-4mm) hole in a sheet of paper
1) Because the fine hole produces an image of the letters at a longer distance
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 207
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
2) Because in doing so, the distance of the object is increased
3) Because in doing so, the focal length of the eye lens is effectively decreased
4) Because in doing so , the focal length of the eye lens is effectively increased
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
Single Correct Choice Type:
1. A person can see clearly upto 1m. The nature and power of the lens which will
enable him to see things at a distance of 3 m is
1) concave, 0.66 D 2) convex, 0.66 D 3) concave, 0.33 D 4) convex, 0.33 D
2. The far point of a myopic eye is 10 cm from the eye. The focal length of a lens for
reading at normal distance ( 25 m ) is
1) 8.35 cm 2) 16.7 cm 3) 35.4 cm 4) .32.7 cm
3. A person can see clearly objects between 15 and 100 cm from his eye. The range of
his vision if he wears close fitting spetancles having a power of 0.8 diopter is
1) 5 to 500 cm 2) 12 to 250 cm 3) 17 to 500 cm 4) 17 to 250 cm
4. The near point of a hypermetropic person is 50 cm from the eye. The power of the
lens required to enable the person to read clearly a book held at 25 cm from the
eye is
1) 2 D 2) 4 D 3) 8 D 4) 1 D
5. A person wears glasses of power 2.5 D . Is the person far-sighted or near-sighted ?
The far point of the person without glasses is
1) long-sighted, 40 cm 2) near-sighted, 40 cm
3) near-sighted, 20 cm 4) long-sighted, 20 cm
6. A long sighted person has a least distance of distinct vision of 50 cm. He wants to
reduce to 25 cm. He should use a
1) concave lens of focal length 50 cm 2) convex of focal length 25 cm
3) convex lens of focal length 50 cm 4) concave lens of focal length 25 cm
Single Correct Choice Type:
7. A person cannot see an object lying beyond 80 cm, where as a normal person can
easily see the object distant 160 cm. The focal length and nature of the lens used
to rectify this defect will be
1) 160 cm, cancave 2) 160 cm, convex 3) 60 cm, concave 4) 60 cm, convex
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 208
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
8. The near point of a person is 50 cm and the far point is 1.5m. The spectacles
required for reading purpose and for seeing distant objects are respectively.
2 2 2 2
1) 2 D , D 2) D, 2 D 3) 2 D , D 4) D , 2 D
3 3 3 3
9. A man cannot see clearly the objects beyond a distance of 20 cm from his eyes. To
see distant objects clearly the kind of lenses and its focal length must be
1) 100 cm, convex 2) 100 cm concave 3) 20 cm convex 4) 20 cm concave
10. A short sighted person can see objects most distinctly at a distance of 16 cm. If he
wears spectacles at a distance of 1 cm from the eye, then their focal length to see
distinctly at a distance of 26 cm
1) 25 cm, convex 2) 25 cm, concave 3) 37.5 cm, convex 4) 37.5 cm, concave
Single Correct Choice Type:
11. An optician while testing the eyes finds the vision of a patient to be 6/12. By this
means that
1) The person can read the letters of 6 inches from a distance of 12 m
2) The person can read the letters of 12 inches from 6 cm
3) The person can read the letters from 6m which the normal eye can read from 12
m
4) The focal length of eye lens had become half that of the normal eye
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 209
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-1_KEY
CUQ : 1) 2 2) 4 3) 2 4) 1 5) 4 6) 2 7) 3 8) 3
9) 1 10) 4
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED:
1) 1 2) 3 3) 1,2 4) 1 5) 2 6) 3 7) 1 8) 3 9) 3
10) 4 11) 2 12) 1 13) 3 14) 2 15) 1 16) 1 17) 1 18) 3
19) 1 20) 1 21) 1 22) 2
1 j g g Cw w
1. 2. i j 3. g tan i
vel i
w
w w C g g 4.
x Sini S in i t
5. time x = thickness 6. ;d i r 7. ; shift sin (i-r)
c Sinr S in r cosr
real depth h 1
8. Apparent distance of fish from bird y 9.
r 10. r d r
2
1 sin c d
t sin i r 1 d1 d 2 d
11. x 12. S t 1 13. d a ; d1 d 2
cos r 1 2 2
d
m ed
Vd r r Cd
C air
t air
14. sin C 15. sin c 16. air C med d
Vr d d Cr t
m ed
sin i sin i R.d
17) a g and g w 18)
sin r sin r A.d
H
19) Fish observing eye : H/2
H
Fish
H 1
Direct observation H1 H H1 H
2 2
20) Fish observing image of eye by mirror,Hence, distance of the eye image from fish,
H
H 3 H
H2 H H H2 H Fish
Eye observing fish
2 2
H + H
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 210
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
H 1
21) Direct observation H1 H H 1
2 2
H H 3
22) Eye observing image of the fish H2 H H 1
2 2
H/ H/2
H/2
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-2_KEY
CUQ : 1) 1 2) 1 3) 2 4) 2 5) 1 6) 4 7) 1
8) 2
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
1) 1 2) 2 3) 4 4) 3 5) 4 6) 1 7) 1
8) a-2; b-3; c-1; d-4,5 9) 2 10) 1 11) 4 12) 2 13) 2
14) 2 15) 2 16) 4 17) 2 18) 2 19) 1
A D
2. i
2
Sin i2
3. r1 0 r2 A 450
Sin r2
1
4. r1 0; ; r2 A d i i A
sin r2 1 2
5. D 2i A
AD
sin
2 ; C
6. A C med
sin
2
7. 1 A
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 211
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
1
9. i c and i ; sin sin c
w g
A
sin 90
sin i 2 1
10. d 180 2 A 2i A
;
sin r A
sin sin c
2
1 g
11. i1 r1 00 ; r2 00 but r2 c and
sin c w
12. D i1 i2 A; Dm D
0 1
13. A 2C 90 ;
sin c
14. r2 0 find r1 from r1 r2 A ; sin i1 sin r1
sin i
15) a g apply for two surfaces
sin r
sin i
16) and d 1
sin r
1
17) L g
sin c
18) one face is silvered r2 0 and i2 0
19) deviation is 1800 m 2
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-3_KEY
1) 1 2) 2 3) 1 4) 4 5) 1 6) 2 7) 2 8) 1 9) 2
10) 4 11) 5 12. (A) – p,r; (B) – q,s,t; (C) – p,r,t ; (D) – q,s 13) 2 14) 3
15) 1
2 1 2 1 1 1.5 1 1.5
1.
v u R v 3 5
2 1 2 1 1.5 1 1.5 1
2. ; v
v u R 100 20
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 212
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
2 1 2 1 1.5 1 1.5 1
3. ;
v u R PO PO R
2 1 2 1 1 1.5 1 1.5
4. ;
v u R v 9 12
2 1 2 1 2 1 1
5. ; 1
v u R 30.75 R
2 1 2 1
6.
v u R
2 1 2 1
7.
v u R
2 1 1 1.5 1 1.5
8. 1 2 ;
v u R v 10 5
2 1 1 1.6 1 1.6
9. 1 2 ;
v u R v 12 6
2 1 2 1 2 1
10. 1 2 ;
v u R 2R R
11. As the mark is viewed from the diametrically opposite position, refraction takes
place at side II of the surface (the mark being on side I as shown)
II
10cm
Mark C P
Here 1 1.5, 2 1; u 2R
2 1 2 1 1 1.5 1 1.5
Using ;
u R 2R R
1 0.5 1.5 0.5
or 4R
R 2R 2R
Negative sign indicates that the image is formed to the left of refracting surface
as shown in Figure. Further, it is given that the image of mark is at a distance 10
cm from the object.
Hence: 4R 2R 10 R 5 cm
12. (A) – p,r; (B) – q,s,t; (C) – p,r,t ; (D) – q,s
3 2 1
(A) 2 2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 213
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
As there is no deviation. As the light bends towards normal in denser medium
2 2 p A & C
(B) As light bends away from normal
3 2 1 2 1 and 3 2 q B & D
(C) 2 3 (As no deviation)
3 2 1
2 1 (As light bends + towards normal) r C & A
(D) 2 1 ; 3 2
As light bends away from normal s = B,D
(E) 2 3 As no deviationof light
3 2 1
2 1 As light bend away from normal t C & B
2 1 2 1
13)
v u R
3
14) on second surface = 180 r 60 900
2
refraction is more than 900
2 1 2 1
15)
v u R
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 214
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-4_KEY
CUQ: 1) 4 2) 4 3) 4 4) 4 5) 3 6) 3 7) 1 8) 2
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
1) 1 2) 4 3) 4 4) 1 5) 2 6) 3 7) 4 8) 4 9) 4
10) 3 11.2, 3 12. (A) – p, q,r ,s (B) – q, (C) – p, q, r, s,(D) – p, q, r, s
13. (i) -AC; (ii) - BD; (iii) -ABCD; (iv)- ABCD 14) 2 15) 1 16) 2 17) 4
18) 1 19) 4 20) 3 21) 4 22) 4 23) 1
1 1 1
1.
f v u
1 1 100
2. p
f R f
f R V 1
3.
fV R 1
1 1 1
4. 1
f R1 R2
(Apply with sign convention)
1 1 1 1 1 1
5. 1 ;
f R1 R2 f v u
1 1 1
6.
f v u
1 1
7. 1
f R
f b 1
8.
fb 1
1 1 1
9. 1
f R1 R2
1 1 1
10. 1
f R1 R2
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 215
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
14. u1 ; v1 f ; u 2 f 20 , v 2 ? ,
1 1 1
Given v2 v1 5 ;
f u v
v2 uv
15. Areal magnification 2
9 v 3u ; f
u uv
1 2 2 1 1 1
16.
F f L 30 ; F v u
1 1 1 v v
17. ; m 1 ; m 1...... i
f u v f f
1 b
y mx c...... ii ; Slope
f c
v 1 1 1
18. u v x 1 ; m 2 ; 3
u f u v
mx
Solving 1 , 2 , 3 ,
f 2
m 1
f 1 lens 1
f lens
19. 1
liq
f 1 lens 1
1 1
f lens 1
20. 1 21) 1
f R1 R2
liq
1 1 1 1 1 1
22) 1 23)
f R1 R2 f v u
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 216
CLASS IX-PHYSICS RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS_WORKSHEET-5_KEY
CUQ
1) 4 2) 4 3) 4 4) 2 5) 4 6) 3 7) 3
8) 1 9) 3
JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
1) 1 2) 2 3) 3 4) 1 5) 2 6) 3 7) 1
8) 1 9) 4 10) 4 11) 3
1 1 1
1. u 3m v 1m f v u
1 1 1
2. u 25cm v 10cm f v u
1 1 1 1
3. p ;
f f v u
1 1 1
4. u 25cm ; v 50cm ; f v u
100
5. f = farpoint =
p
1 1 1
6. u 25 cm ; v 50cm ;
f v u
1 1 1
7.
f v u
100
8. p
f
1 1 1
9. ; u , v 20 cm
F v u
1 1 1
10. v 16 1 15 cm u 26 1 25 cm and f v u
1 1 1
11) f . p dis tan ce of object f p
***************
Advanced Foundation Course - Municipal Schools - Govt. of A.P. 217
You might also like
- 5 Steps to a 5 500 AP Physics 1 Questions to Know by Test Day - IncNo ratings yet5 Steps to a 5 500 AP Physics 1 Questions to Know by Test Day - Inc289 pages
- Specimen Copy - Class-IX (Page No. 1-183)No ratings yetSpecimen Copy - Class-IX (Page No. 1-183)183 pages
- Class 9 Science Chapter 8 Revision NotesNo ratings yetClass 9 Science Chapter 8 Revision Notes46 pages
- Hivemind - Foundation Physics-9 - Page-64 (Book Code 314.24)No ratings yetHivemind - Foundation Physics-9 - Page-64 (Book Code 314.24)64 pages
- Motion in a Straight Line Class 11 Notes CBSE Physics Chapter 2 [PDF]No ratings yetMotion in a Straight Line Class 11 Notes CBSE Physics Chapter 2 [PDF]16 pages
- Class IX SCIENCE IITFoundation & Olympiad Study Package (PDFDrive)No ratings yetClass IX SCIENCE IITFoundation & Olympiad Study Package (PDFDrive)234 pages
- I Am Sharing 'Chapter 07 Motion' With YouNo ratings yetI Am Sharing 'Chapter 07 Motion' With You15 pages
- NCERT Solutions For Science Chapter 7 Motion Class 9 FREE PDF DownloadNo ratings yetNCERT Solutions For Science Chapter 7 Motion Class 9 FREE PDF Download30 pages
- Science and Technology For Class 9 Maharashtra Board80% (5)Science and Technology For Class 9 Maharashtra Board216 pages
- Chapter 8 - Motion Revision Notes PDF PDF AccNo ratings yetChapter 8 - Motion Revision Notes PDF PDF Acc4 pages
- Understanding Motion: Reference Point and Reference FrameNo ratings yetUnderstanding Motion: Reference Point and Reference Frame17 pages
- Class 11 Chapter 3 Motion in Straight Line @cbseinfiniteNo ratings yetClass 11 Chapter 3 Motion in Straight Line @cbseinfinite7 pages
- Part 2-: Applications in Linear and Angular KinematicsNo ratings yetPart 2-: Applications in Linear and Angular Kinematics27 pages
- Introduction To Basic Differential Calculus100% (1)Introduction To Basic Differential Calculus11 pages
- Kvpy Class 11 Sa Stream Mock Test-2 (Cty P-1 Syllabus)0% (2)Kvpy Class 11 Sa Stream Mock Test-2 (Cty P-1 Syllabus)7 pages
- GRADES 1 To 12 Daily Lesson Log Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday FridayNo ratings yetGRADES 1 To 12 Daily Lesson Log Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday10 pages
- IIT JEE 2014 Physics Assignment Kinematics SolutionNo ratings yetIIT JEE 2014 Physics Assignment Kinematics Solution6 pages
- Student Exploration: Force and Fan Carts: Vocabulary: Force, Friction, Position, SpeedNo ratings yetStudent Exploration: Force and Fan Carts: Vocabulary: Force, Friction, Position, Speed4 pages
- The Relativity of Simultaneity: An Analysis Based On The Properties of Electromagnetic WavesNo ratings yetThe Relativity of Simultaneity: An Analysis Based On The Properties of Electromagnetic Waves13 pages
- Ix - Intso (Stso) - Level - I - W.S - 3 - MotionNo ratings yetIx - Intso (Stso) - Level - I - W.S - 3 - Motion2 pages
- National Public School, Koramangala Revision Worksheet A. Complete The FollowingNo ratings yetNational Public School, Koramangala Revision Worksheet A. Complete The Following2 pages
- The Act of Touch in All Its Diversity: An Analysis and Synthesis of Pianoforte Tone-ProductionFrom EverandThe Act of Touch in All Its Diversity: An Analysis and Synthesis of Pianoforte Tone-ProductionNo ratings yet
- Physics Part Two Dictionary - Natural Science: Grow Your Vocabulary, #37From EverandPhysics Part Two Dictionary - Natural Science: Grow Your Vocabulary, #37No ratings yet
- Basic Physics for Beginners: A Comprehensive Study Guide for the Self-Taught ScientistFrom EverandBasic Physics for Beginners: A Comprehensive Study Guide for the Self-Taught ScientistNo ratings yet
- Physics: Try This at Home: Do it yourself physics for the fearfulFrom EverandPhysics: Try This at Home: Do it yourself physics for the fearfulNo ratings yet
- Feynman Lectures Simplified 1C: Special Relativity and the Physics of LightFrom EverandFeynman Lectures Simplified 1C: Special Relativity and the Physics of LightNo ratings yet
